Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 5 3 4 5 9 9 9 7 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (JC/JG) 187443/4
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
A rocket is launched vertically upwards from the ground. The rocket travels with uniform
acceleration from rest. After 8.0 s, the speed of the rocket is 120 m / s.
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(b) (i)
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for the motion of the rocket in the first 8.0 s.
speed
m/s
200
150
100
50
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(ii)
[1]
Use the graph to determine the height of the rocket at 8.0 s.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(iii)
From time = 8.0 s to time = 20.0 s, the rocket rises with increasing speed but with
decreasing acceleration.
From time = 20.0 s to time = 25.0 s, the rocket has a constant speed of less than 200 m / s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows an athlete crossing the finishing line in a race. As she crosses the finishing line, her
speed is 10.0 m / s. She slows down to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the athlete is 71 kg. Calculate the impulse applied to her as she slows down.
impulse = ........................................................ [3]
(b) (i)
Define impulse in terms of force and time.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The athlete takes 1.2 s to slow down from a speed of 10.0 m / s to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the athlete as she slows down.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the force required to give a mass of 71 kg an acceleration of 6.4 m / s2.
force = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a model of a wind turbine used to demonstrate the use of wind energy to generate
electricity. The wind is blowing towards the model, as shown.
turbine blades
circular area swept out
by turbine blades
wind
V
A
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades each
second is 7.5 kg. The kinetic energy of the air that passes through this circular area each
second is 240 J.
(i)
Calculate the speed of the air.
speed = ........................................................ [3]
(ii)
The kinetic energy of the air drives a generator. State the input power of the air passing
through the turbine blades.
input power = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
5
(b) The output current of the generator is 2.0 A. The output potential difference (p.d.) of the
generator is 11 V.
(i)
Calculate the output power of the generator.
output power = ........................................................ [2]
(ii)
Calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.
efficiency = .................................................... % [2]
(c) The density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.
Calculate the volume of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades
each second.
volume = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Define the specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to 0.35 kg of water. The initial temperature of the water is
24.5 °C. The temperature of the water decreases to 0 °C. The water loses 35 000 J of thermal
energy as it cools. All of the ice added to the water melts.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate:
(i)
the specific heat capacity of water
specific heat capacity = ........................................................ [2]
(ii)
the mass of ice added to the water.
mass = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
7
5
(a) Complete the sentences with words that describe the main process of thermal energy transfer
in each case.
A man goes for a walk on a cold day. He touches a metal gate, which removes thermal
energy from his hands by ................................. . He holds the sides of a cup containing a
hot drink. His hands gain thermal energy by ................................. . Some farm workers have
lit a fire. The man warms his hands by the side of the fire. His hands gain thermal energy by
................................. .
[3]
(b) Describe in terms of particles the transfer of thermal energy through the metal of the gate
after transfer from the man’s hands.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.
windscreen
object A
Fig. 5.1
The object labelled A is placed inside the windscreen. It is used by the owner of the car to
reduce the temperature rise of the air in the car.
Ring the most suitable material for the outer surface of object A. Explain your choice.
dull black
dull white
shiny black
shiny white
explanation ................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a water wave moving from left to right in a harbour.
crest of wave
A
harbour wall
Fig. 6.1
(i)
On Fig. 6.1, draw three more crests to the right of point A.
(ii)
State the name of the wave process that occurs as the wave passes point A.
[2]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of another wave moving from left to right in a different part of the
harbour. This wave moves from deep water to shallow water.
deep water
shallow water
crest of wave
Fig. 6.2
(i)
On Fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the wave after it has
passed into the shallow water.
[1]
(ii)
State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes into the shallow water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
9
(iii)
Complete Table 6.1 to state whether each of the properties of the wave increases,
decreases or stays the same as the wave passes into the shallow water.
Table 6.1
property
effect
wavelength
frequency
speed
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and the image I formed when an object is placed to the left
of the lens. The principal focuses are labelled A and B and the centre of the lens is labelled C.
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays to locate the position of the object.
Draw the object and label it O.
lens
A
C
B
Fig. 7.1
(ii)
[3]
Ring all of the following distances that are equal to the focal length of the lens.
AB
© UCLES 2020
I
AC
CB
0625/42/F/M/20
2AB
[2]
11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows green light passing through a triangular glass block.
Fig. 7.2
Red light enters the triangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.2 along the same path as the green
light.
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the red light within the triangular glass block.
[1]
Fig. 7.3 shows green light passing through a rectangular glass block.
Red light enters the rectangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.3 along the same path as the
green light.
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3:
(ii)
draw the path of the red light within the rectangular glass block
[1]
(iii)
draw the path of the red light after leaving the rectangular glass block.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
A
3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
X
Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.1
The lamp has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. Line XY represents a uniform resistance wire of resistance
6.0 Ω.
(a) Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the circuit with a different connection to the resistance wire and an added
resistor. The length XY of the whole resistance wire is 2.0 m. The contact is made at Q where
the distance XQ is 0.60 m.
12 V
A
3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
1.5 Ω
0.60 m
X
Q
Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.2
Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
14
9
(a) State the name of the logic gate with the symbol shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the name of the logic gate with the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
input
output
0
1
1
0
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
A
C
E
B
D
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table in Table 9.2 for this circuit for all possible combinations of input.
Table 9.2
A
B
C
D
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
E
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
15
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is a simplified top view of a flat coil. There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil.
Fig. 10.1
Describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a pan placed above the coil. The base of the pan is made of steel.
pan
coil
Fig. 10.2
State what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The pan contains water.
State and explain the effect of the quantity induced in part (b) on the temperature of the water
in the pan.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
16
11
(a) The isotope hydrogen-1 has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.
Two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.
Helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.
Helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.
Complete Table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium.
Table 11.1
helium-3
helium-4
number of neutrons
number of electrons
mass compared to a neutral
atom of hydrogen-1
[3]
(b) An experiment takes place in a laboratory shielded from all background radiation. A sample
of radioactive material is wrapped in aluminium foil of thickness 0.1 mm. A detector of ionising
radiation placed 1 cm from the foil records a reading.
A piece of aluminium of thickness 5 mm is placed between the detector and the foil. The
detector reading drops to zero.
State and explain any type of radiation passing through the aluminium foil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 5 3 4 5 9 9 9 7 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
February/March 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (JC/JG) 187443/4
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
A rocket is launched vertically upwards from the ground. The rocket travels with uniform
acceleration from rest. After 8.0 s, the speed of the rocket is 120 m / s.
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(b) (i)
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for the motion of the rocket in the first 8.0 s.
speed
m/s
200
150
100
50
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(ii)
[1]
Use the graph to determine the height of the rocket at 8.0 s.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(iii)
From time = 8.0 s to time = 20.0 s, the rocket rises with increasing speed but with
decreasing acceleration.
From time = 20.0 s to time = 25.0 s, the rocket has a constant speed of less than 200 m / s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows an athlete crossing the finishing line in a race. As she crosses the finishing line, her
speed is 10.0 m / s. She slows down to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the athlete is 71 kg. Calculate the impulse applied to her as she slows down.
impulse = ........................................................ [3]
(b) (i)
Define impulse in terms of force and time.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The athlete takes 1.2 s to slow down from a speed of 10.0 m / s to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the athlete as she slows down.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the force required to give a mass of 71 kg an acceleration of 6.4 m / s2.
force = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a model of a wind turbine used to demonstrate the use of wind energy to generate
electricity. The wind is blowing towards the model, as shown.
turbine blades
circular area swept out
by turbine blades
wind
V
A
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades each
second is 7.5 kg. The kinetic energy of the air that passes through this circular area each
second is 240 J.
(i)
Calculate the speed of the air.
speed = ........................................................ [3]
(ii)
The kinetic energy of the air drives a generator. State the input power of the air passing
through the turbine blades.
input power = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
5
(b) The output current of the generator is 2.0 A. The output potential difference (p.d.) of the
generator is 11 V.
(i)
Calculate the output power of the generator.
output power = ........................................................ [2]
(ii)
Calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.
efficiency = .................................................... % [2]
(c) The density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.
Calculate the volume of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades
each second.
volume = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Define the specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to 0.35 kg of water. The initial temperature of the water is
24.5 °C. The temperature of the water decreases to 0 °C. The water loses 35 000 J of thermal
energy as it cools. All of the ice added to the water melts.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate:
(i)
the specific heat capacity of water
specific heat capacity = ........................................................ [2]
(ii)
the mass of ice added to the water.
mass = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
7
5
(a) Complete the sentences with words that describe the main process of thermal energy transfer
in each case.
A man goes for a walk on a cold day. He touches a metal gate, which removes thermal
energy from his hands by ................................. . He holds the sides of a cup containing a
hot drink. His hands gain thermal energy by ................................. . Some farm workers have
lit a fire. The man warms his hands by the side of the fire. His hands gain thermal energy by
................................. .
[3]
(b) Describe in terms of particles the transfer of thermal energy through the metal of the gate
after transfer from the man’s hands.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.
windscreen
object A
Fig. 5.1
The object labelled A is placed inside the windscreen. It is used by the owner of the car to
reduce the temperature rise of the air in the car.
Ring the most suitable material for the outer surface of object A. Explain your choice.
dull black
dull white
shiny black
shiny white
explanation ................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a water wave moving from left to right in a harbour.
crest of wave
A
harbour wall
Fig. 6.1
(i)
On Fig. 6.1, draw three more crests to the right of point A.
(ii)
State the name of the wave process that occurs as the wave passes point A.
[2]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of another wave moving from left to right in a different part of the
harbour. This wave moves from deep water to shallow water.
deep water
shallow water
crest of wave
Fig. 6.2
(i)
On Fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the wave after it has
passed into the shallow water.
[1]
(ii)
State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes into the shallow water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
9
(iii)
Complete Table 6.1 to state whether each of the properties of the wave increases,
decreases or stays the same as the wave passes into the shallow water.
Table 6.1
property
effect
wavelength
frequency
speed
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and the image I formed when an object is placed to the left
of the lens. The principal focuses are labelled A and B and the centre of the lens is labelled C.
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays to locate the position of the object.
Draw the object and label it O.
lens
A
C
B
Fig. 7.1
(ii)
[3]
Ring all of the following distances that are equal to the focal length of the lens.
AB
© UCLES 2020
I
AC
CB
0625/42/F/M/20
2AB
[2]
11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows green light passing through a triangular glass block.
Fig. 7.2
Red light enters the triangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.2 along the same path as the green
light.
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the red light within the triangular glass block.
[1]
Fig. 7.3 shows green light passing through a rectangular glass block.
Red light enters the rectangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.3 along the same path as the
green light.
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3:
(ii)
draw the path of the red light within the rectangular glass block
[1]
(iii)
draw the path of the red light after leaving the rectangular glass block.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
A
3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
X
Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.1
The lamp has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. Line XY represents a uniform resistance wire of resistance
6.0 Ω.
(a) Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the circuit with a different connection to the resistance wire and an added
resistor. The length XY of the whole resistance wire is 2.0 m. The contact is made at Q where
the distance XQ is 0.60 m.
12 V
A
3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
1.5 Ω
0.60 m
X
Q
Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.2
Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
14
9
(a) State the name of the logic gate with the symbol shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the name of the logic gate with the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
input
output
0
1
1
0
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
A
C
E
B
D
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table in Table 9.2 for this circuit for all possible combinations of input.
Table 9.2
A
B
C
D
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
E
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
15
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is a simplified top view of a flat coil. There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil.
Fig. 10.1
Describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a pan placed above the coil. The base of the pan is made of steel.
pan
coil
Fig. 10.2
State what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The pan contains water.
State and explain the effect of the quantity induced in part (b) on the temperature of the water
in the pan.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
[Turn over
16
11
(a) The isotope hydrogen-1 has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.
Two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.
Helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.
Helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.
Complete Table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium.
Table 11.1
helium-3
helium-4
number of neutrons
number of electrons
mass compared to a neutral
atom of hydrogen-1
[3]
(b) An experiment takes place in a laboratory shielded from all background radiation. A sample
of radioactive material is wrapped in aluminium foil of thickness 0.1 mm. A detector of ionising
radiation placed 1 cm from the foil records a reading.
A piece of aluminium of thickness 5 mm is placed between the detector and the foil. The
detector reading drops to zero.
State and explain any type of radiation passing through the aluminium foil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/F/M/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 3 2 4 5 0 9 7 6 7 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
February/March 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
[No additional materials are needed.]
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CGW) 203605/2
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a piece of glass of thickness 2.0 cm and area 0.15 m2.
The density of the glass is 2.6 × 103 kg / m3.
area 0.15 m2
thickness 2.0 cm
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
Calculate the weight of the piece of glass.
weight = ..................................................... [3]
(b) The piece of glass shown in Fig. 1.1 is used as the vertical viewing window of an aquarium.
The atmospheric pressure outside the aquarium is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The average pressure on
the inside of the aquarium window is 1.3 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the resultant force acting on the window due to these pressures and state the
direction in which it acts.
force = ...........................................................
direction of force ..............................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a vacuum pump connected to the top of a vertical tube with its lower end
immersed in a tank of liquid. The pump reduces the pressure above the column to zero and
the pressure at point X is 9.6 × 104 Pa.
vacuum
pump
point X
12 m
liquid
Fig. 1.2 (not to scale)
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ..................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
[Turn over
4
2
(a) (i)
State what is meant by the moment of a force about a point.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Fig. 2.1 shows a large crane on a construction site lifting a block of mass 14 000 kg.
operator’s cabin
20 m
A
B
counterweight
block
Fig. 2.1
Calculate the moment about A due to the 14 000 kg block suspended from B.
moment = ..................................................... [2]
(b) (i)
Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity. State the difference between
a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Write down one other scalar quantity and one other vector quantity.
scalar quantity ...................................................................................................................
vector quantity ...................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
5
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows two forces acting on an object.
60°
30 N
20 N
Fig. 2.2 (not to scale)
Draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant force acting on the object. State the scale
you use.
scale ..............................................................
magnitude of resultant force = ...........................................................
direction of resultant relative to the direction of the 20 N force = ...........................................................
[4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
[Turn over
6
3
A power station burns waste materials from farm crops to generate electricity.
(a) State and explain whether this process is renewable.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The power station uses some of its waste thermal energy to heat water for houses in a nearby
town.
State one problem of using waste energy in this way if the power station is far from the town.
...................................................................................................................................................
Suggest a way of reducing this problem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two environmental consequences of burning coal to generate electricity.
consequence 1. ........................................................................................................................
consequence 2. ........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
7
4
(a) In terms of the momentum of molecules, explain how a gas exerts pressure on the walls of its
container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A fixed mass of gas of volume V1 is at a pressure p1. It is compressed to a volume V2.
(i)
Complete the equation for the final pressure p2 of the gas when the gas is compressed
at constant temperature.
p2 =
(ii)
[2]
State and explain how the final pressure compares with p2 when the temperature of the
gas increases during compression.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
[Turn over
8
5
(a) State the name of the reflection of a sound wave or ultrasound wave.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound wave being used to scan an internal organ of a human body.
ultrasound transmitter
and receiver
internal organ
ultrasound
wave
Fig. 5.1
The ultrasound wave has a frequency of 2.0 MHz and passes through human tissue at a
speed of 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the ultrasound wave in human tissue.
wavelength = ..................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows crests of a wave from a point source S approaching a straight barrier.
straight barrier
S
Fig. 5.2
(i)
On Fig. 5.2, indicate and label one wavelength.
(ii)
On Fig. 5.2, draw three crests of the wave reflected from the barrier.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
9
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 is a full scale diagram showing a converging lens, the two principal focuses F1 and F2
and an object PO.
F1
P
F2
O
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw two rays from point O of the object to determine the position of the image.
Label the image IJ. Measure the length of the image.
image length = ...........................................................
[3]
(b) Ring three descriptions of the image.
diminished
same way up as object
© UCLES 2021
magnified
real
same size
upside down compared to object
0625/42/F/M/21
virtual
[3]
[Turn over
10
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows three rays of green light passing through glass blocks.
ray of green light
glass blocks
Fig. 6.2
Three rays of red light approach the glass blocks on the same paths as the rays of green
light.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the paths of these rays of red light to the right of the glass blocks.
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
11
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a horizontal conducting wire XY between two opposite magnetic poles. Wire XY
forms a circuit with an ammeter.
Y
wire
N
X
S
A
Fig. 7.1
(a) Explain why the reading on the ammeter is zero when the wire XY is not moving.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The wire XY is moved and there is a deflection on the ammeter that indicates there is a
current in the wire from X to Y.
On Table 7.1, tick one box to indicate the direction of the movement of the wire XY and
explain your answer.
Table 7.1
into page
out of page
to the left
to the right
to the bottom
of the page
to the top of
the page
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) State what is observed on the ammeter when the wire XY is moved
(i)
in the opposite direction to part (b) ............................................................................... [1]
(ii)
in the same direction as part (b) but at a greater speed ............................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
[Turn over
12
8
(a) Define electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a source E of e.m.f. 60 V in a circuit.
E
10 Ω
H
X
Fig. 8.1
The heater H has a resistance of 22.5 Ω and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 45 V.
Calculate:
(i)
the power of the heater
power = ..................................................... [3]
(ii)
the p.d. across resistor X
p.d. = ..................................................... [2]
(iii)
the current in the 10 Ω resistor.
current = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
13
9
(a) Write down the truth table for an OR gate.
[2]
(b) Draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit designed to produce the values shown in Table 9.1 for the
output S from the two inputs P and Q.
gate X
P
S
Q
R
Fig. 9.1
(i)
Table 9.1 is the truth table for the circuit shown in Fig. 9.1.
Table 9.1
P
Q
R
S
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
Complete the column for point R in Table 9.1.
(ii)
[1]
State which type of gate is used for gate X. Explain your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
14
10 (a) State the proton number, nucleon number and the value of the charge on an α-particle.
proton number ..........................................................................................................................
nucleon number ........................................................................................................................
charge .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A nucleus of strontium-90 consists of 38 protons and 52 neutrons. Strontium-90 is radioactive
and decays by β-emission to an isotope of yttrium. The symbol for strontium is Sr and the
symbol for yttrium is Y. Write down the nuclide equation of this decay.
[3]
(c) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s. A sample of radon-220 is in a container. After 112 s the mass
of radon-220 is 9.2 mg.
Calculate the mass of the original sample.
mass = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/F/M/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 1 9 7 8 4 2 8 8 5 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
February/March 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (NF/CGW) 302381/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
A ball rolls down a ramp and onto a horizontal surface. The first section of the horizontal surface is
smooth. The second section of the horizontal surface is rough. Fig. 1.1 shows a speed–time graph
for the ball.
14.0
speed
m/s
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0
1.0
3.0
2.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the time when the ball reaches the start of the rough section of the horizontal surface.
time = ..................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how Fig. 1.1 shows that there is no resultant force on the ball when it rolls along the
smooth section of the horizontal surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
3
(c) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the acceleration of the ball as it rolls down the ramp.
acceleration = ..................................................... [3]
(d) The ball starts from rest at the top of the ramp.
Show that the length of the ramp is 9.6 m.
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a spring balance used to measure the weight of a baby. The spring inside the
balance extends when a mass is suspended from it. The dial shows the extension of spring as a
value of mass in kg.
dial
cradle with
negligible mass
Fig. 2.1
The spring obeys Hooke’s law up to a weight of 175 N.
(a) (i)
State Hooke’s law.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the relationship between the mass of the baby and the force exerted on the spring
due to the baby.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
The reading on the spring balance is 8.0 kg.
Determine the force exerted on the spring due to the baby.
force = ..................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
5
(b) The limit of proportionality for the spring is at a force of 175 N.
Sketch the extension–load graph for the spring. The sketch must continue beyond a force of
175 N.
extension
0
0
175 load / N
[2]
(c) The baby is carried from the ground floor to the bedroom. The vertical height of the bedroom
above the ground floor is 3.5 m.
Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the baby when it is carried from the
ground floor to the bedroom.
change in gravitational potential energy = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 and Fig. 3.2 show how a puddle of water changes on a warm windy day.
puddle of
water
puddle of water
three hours later
solid road
surface
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
(a) Describe the process by which the volume of water in the puddle decreases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State and explain one change in the weather that would cause the volume of water in the
puddle to decrease more slowly.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Explain, in terms of molecules, how sweating helps to cool your body on a hot day.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
7
4
(a) A sample of sand has a volume of 0.050 m3. The density of the sand is 1900 kg / m3. The
specific heat capacity of the sand is 1500 J / (kg °C).
(i)
Calculate the mass of the sample of sand.
mass = ..................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the thermal capacity of the sample of sand.
thermal capacity = ..................................................... [2]
(iii)
The initial temperature of the sample of sand is 7.0 °C. The sample of sand is heated
using an electrical heater. The power of the heating element is 50 W.
Calculate the time taken to increase the temperature of the sand to 19.0 °C.
time = ..................................................... [3]
(b) In some countries, the soil is too cold for plants to grow well. In these countries, plants are
grown in plastic pots and kept inside. The pots, containing soil, are placed on sand. The sand
is heated using an electrical heater, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
plant
soil
plastic
plant pot
sand
heating element in sand
Fig. 4.1
(i)
Describe, in terms of molecules, how thermal energy is transferred from the heated sand
through the base of the plastic pot.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2022
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/42/F/M/22
[Turn over
8
(ii)
The heating element in Fig. 4.1 remains switched on. The temperature of the sand
remains constant at a value above room temperature.
Explain why the temperature of the sand remains constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
9
5
A boy looks at the image of a clock in a plane mirror. Fig. 5.1 shows the mirror, the clock and the
position of one of the boy’s eyes.
mirror
boy’s eye
clock
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray of light from the clock, reflected to the boy’s eye.
[2]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, mark with an X the position of the image of the clock.
[1]
(iii)
State whether the image formed by the mirror is virtual or real.
Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
Fig. 5.2 shows the image of the clock seen by the boy.
Fig. 5.2
The boy now looks directly at the clock.
On Fig. 5.3, draw what the boy sees.
Fig. 5.3
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
[1]
[Turn over
10
(b) (i)
The clock is illuminated by a source of monochromatic green light.
State the meaning of monochromatic.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The green light has a wavelength of 5.6 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of this green light.
frequency = ..................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
11
6
Fig. 6.1 shows two bar magnets.
N
S
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, sketch the pattern and the direction of the magnetic field lines between the bar
magnets.
[2]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the same bar magnets with a coil of wire between them.
direction of
rotation
N
galvanometer
handle
S
A
Fig. 6.2
(i)
Name the parts labelled A in Fig. 6.2.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The coil of wire is rotated in the direction shown in Fig. 6.2.
On Fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of the current in the coil. Explain your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
Explain how rotating the coil in Fig. 6.2 continuously causes the galvanometer needle to
show an alternating current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
[Total: 9]
[Turn over
12
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit including a 12 V battery and two identical lamps.
A
Q
Fig. 7.1
(a) The 12 V battery consists of cells connected in series. Each cell in the battery has an
electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.5 V.
Determine how many cells are in the battery.
number of cells = ..................................................... [1]
(b) (i)
When the switch is closed, the ammeter reading is 2.4 A.
Calculate the total resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ..................................................... [2]
(ii)
Each lamp has a resistance of 3.0 Ω.
Calculate the resistance of Q.
resistance of Q = ..................................................... [2]
(c) (i)
On Fig. 7.1, draw the symbol for a voltmeter that measures the potential difference (p.d.)
across the two lamps.
[1]
(ii) Calculate the power supplied to one lamp.
power = ..................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
13
8
A radio is connected to the mains supply using a step-down transformer.
(a) Draw a labelled diagram of the structure of a basic step-down transformer.
[3]
(b) Explain the operation of a basic transformer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The voltage of the mains supply is 230 V. The output voltage of the transformer is 6.0 V.
Calculate the value of the turns ratio (
Ns
). Give your answer to two significant figures.
Np
value of turns ratio = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit.
A
B
C
D
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i)
Explain what is meant by digital.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Table 9.1 is a truth table for the digital circuit shown in Fig. 9.1.
Complete the columns C and D in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
A
B
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
C
D
[2]
(b) State the single logic gate that would produce the same output D from inputs A and B.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
15
10 The isotope americium-241 is represented by
241 Am.
95
This isotope decays by an α-emission to an isotope of neptunium (Np).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
........
........
241 Am
95
+
........Np ........α
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a simple diagram of a smoke detector. The smoke detector contains a
small sample of americium-241. This isotope ionises the air between the metal plates in the
detector.
detector circuit
radioactive
source
air flow
metal plates
Fig. 10.1
(i)
Describe how the americium-241 ionises air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
Suggest and explain two reasons why smoke detectors use an isotope that emits
α-particles rather than an isotope that emits γ-radiation.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/F/M/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 5 7 5 9 0 2 6 3 4 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
February/March 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (EF/SG) 321611/2
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
3
1
(a) A boat crosses a river. The boat points at right angles to the river bank and it travels at a
speed of 3.5 m / s relative to the water.
A river current acts at right angles to the direction the boat points. The river current has a
speed of 2.5 m / s.
By drawing a scale diagram or by calculation, determine the speed and direction of the boat
relative to the river bank.
speed = ...............................................................
direction relative to the river bank = ...............................................................
[4]
(b) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity.
State the names of one other scalar quantity and one other vector quantity.
scalar quantity ..........................................................................................................................
vector quantity ..........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a ship loaded with containers.
containers
ship
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) The ship is made of steel.
The density of steel is 7800 kg / m3 and the density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Explain why the ship floats in the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The containers with the greatest mass are loaded near the bottom of the ship.
State and explain the effect on the stability of the ship of loading the containers in this way.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A crane lifts a container 48 m vertically upwards. The mass of the container is 30 000 kg.
Calculate the energy transferred to the gravitational potential energy stored in the container.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
5
3
(a) State the principle of conservation of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A wind turbine has a maximum output power of 1.8 MW. The turbine operates at maximum
power for 4.0 h.
(i)
Define the unit kW h.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the energy produced by the wind turbine operating at maximum power for
4.0 h. Give your answer in kW h.
energy = ................................................. kW h [2]
(c) Radiation from the Sun is the main source of energy for most of our energy resources.
State two energy resources that are not due to radiation from the Sun.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a metal pan on an electric hotplate. The pan contains 200 cm3 of water.
water
metal pan
hotplate
Fig. 4.1
The pan is heated. The temperature of the water in the pan increases.
(a) Thermal energy is transferred through the metal pan by conduction.
State and explain the two ways that thermal energy is conducted in a metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i)
The water boils and leaves the liquid as a gas.
Explain, in terms of forces and distances between particles, why the gas occupies a
much greater volume than it does as a liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
7
(c) The water is replaced with 200 cm3 of milk.
The initial temperature of the milk is 20.0 °C. The boiling point of milk is 95.0 °C.
The milk starts to boil when 60 700 J of thermal energy has been transferred to it. The density
of milk is 1.03 g / cm3.
Calculate the value of the specific heat capacity of milk. Give your answer to 3 significant
figures.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
8
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a semicircular transparent plastic block.
semicircular
transparent
plastic block
Fig. 5.1
A ray of light is incident normally on the curved surface of the block. The refractive index of
the plastic is 1.5.
(i)
Calculate the critical angle for the plastic.
critical angle = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, draw the path of the ray in the block and after the ray emerges from the
block.
[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 is a full‑scale diagram of a lens and an object O.
lens
F
O
Fig. 5.2
The point marked F shows the position of a principal focus of the lens.
(i)
Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
© UCLES 2023
On Fig. 5.2, draw two rays from the object to locate the image. Label the image I.
0625/42/F/M/23
[3]
9
(c) Fig. 5.3 shows a simplified diagram of an eye with rays from a distant object and the path of
the rays inside the eye of a person with short sight.
retina
lens
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.4, draw an additional lens outside the eye to correct short‑sightedness and show
the path of the rays inside the eye.
Fig. 5.4
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
10
6
(a) Sound waves have compressions and rarefactions.
Explain what is meant by compression and rarefaction.
compression .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) We can see light from the Sun but we cannot hear any sound from it.
State the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) During a thunderstorm, an observer sees the lightning almost immediately but hears the
sound of the thunder several seconds later. The thunder and lightning are produced at the
same time.
The sound of the thunder is heard 9.0 s after the lightning is seen. The speed of sound in air
is 340 m / s.
Calculate the distance from the thunderstorm to the observer.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
11
(d) In a lightning strike, there is a current of 3.0 × 104 A for 48 ms.
Calculate the charge that flows.
charge = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
12
7
(a) Define potential difference (p.d.).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i)
State the equation which defines electromotive force (e.m.f.) E.
[1]
(ii)
The e.m.f. of a battery is 9.0 V. The battery is in a circuit.
Calculate the work done by the battery when it moves a charge of 30 C around a complete
circuit.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(c) A circuit consists of a d.c. power supply, a lamp and a thermistor.
(i)
Draw a circuit diagram of these components connected in series.
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
13
(ii)
Explain what happens in the circuit you have drawn in (c)(i) when the temperature of the
thermistor is increased.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
14
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a horizontal, flat coil in a magnetic field
coil
B
axis
N A
S
Fig. 8.1
The coil is connected to a cell. The coil rotates.
(a) Determine the direction of movement of the side AB relative to the plane of the coil.
direction of movement = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Explain how you determined the direction in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain what happens to the coil as it reaches the vertical position.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) To operate as a motor, a split‑ring commutator and brushes are added to the parts shown in
Fig. 8.1.
Explain the effects of the split‑ring commutator and the brushes on the action of the motor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
15
9
(a) A nuclear power station has a reactor where controlled nuclear fission of uranium‑235 takes
place.
(i)
Explain what is meant by nuclear fission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
State one advantage and one disadvantage of generating electrical power in nuclear
power stations compared with electrical power generated using wind turbines.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Deuterium is an isotope of hydrogen (H) with 1 proton and 1 neutron. Nuclear fusion occurs
when two nuclei of deuterium combine. An isotope of helium (He) and a neutron are formed.
Use nuclide notation to write down the nuclide equation for this reaction.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
[Turn over
16
10 (a) The time taken for Mars to orbit the Sun is 690 Earth days. The average orbital radius of Mars
is 2.28 × 108 km. An Earth day is 24 h.
Calculate the average orbital speed of Mars in km / s.
average speed = ......................................................... [3]
(b) State the shape of the orbits of the planets.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Light from a distant galaxy is redshifted.
(i)
Explain what is meant by redshift.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State the quantity that the redshift of a galaxy is used to calculate.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/F/M/23
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 4 5 7 8 1 1 6 1 2 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
February/March 2024
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (PB/SG) 331682/3
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Fig. 1.1. is a speed–time graph for the first 5 minutes of a bus journey.
10.0
speed
m/s
7.5
5.0
2.5
0
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
t / min
Fig. 1.1
Describe the motion between:
1. t = 0.90 min and t = 2.9 min
.....................................................................
2. t = 2.9 min and t = 3.5 min
.....................................................................
3. t = 3.5 min and t = 4.5 min
.....................................................................
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[3]
3
(b) Another bus travels at a speed of 8.9 m / s. The brakes apply a constant force and the bus
stops in a distance of 23 m. This bus has a mass of 18 000 kg.
(i)
Calculate the kinetic energy of the bus before the brakes are applied.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the force applied to stop the bus.
force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
4
2
(a) Define impulse.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a rocket and its exhaust gases.
rocket
exhaust gases
Fig. 2.1
The exhaust gases are emitted from the rocket with a velocity of 1400 m / s and at a rate
of 2800 kg / s.
(i)
Show that the force exerted on the rocket by the exhaust gases is 3900 kN.
State the equation you use.
[2]
(ii)
Calculate the maximum mass that this force can lift from the ground. Ignore air resistance.
maximum mass = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
5
3
(a) A car has a weight of 13 000 N. The car is supported by 4 tyres. The area of each tyre in
contact with the road is 0.016 m2.
(i)
Calculate the pressure on the road due to the weight of the car.
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain, in terms of particles, why the air pressure in the tyres increases when the car
travels along the road.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) A gas cylinder contains helium gas at a pressure of 2.0 × 106 Pa. A volume of 0.026 m3 of the
compressed gas is released from the cylinder into balloons. Each balloon contains 0.015 m3
of helium at atmospheric pressure (1.0 × 105 Pa). The temperature remains constant.
Calculate the maximum number of balloons that can be filled.
maximum number of balloons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A volume of 0.0024 m3 of oil is heated in a pan for 7.0 min. The temperature of the oil increases
from 20 °C to 180 °C.
The density of the oil is 910 kg / m3. The specific heat capacity of the oil is 2000 J / (kg °C).
(i)
Calculate the mass of oil in the pan.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the oil.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Calculate the power required to supply the energy calculated in (b)(ii).
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
7
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
8
5
(a) (i)
Table 5.1 shows applications of regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Complete the second column of the table with the region of the electromagnetic spectrum
used for each application.
Choose from the regions in this list:
gamma rays
infrared
microwaves
radio waves
ultraviolet
Each region may be used once, more than once or not at all.
Table 5.1
application
region of electromagnetic spectrum
cancer treatment
gamma rays
Bluetooth data connection
optical fibres
security marking
sterilising food
wireless internet
[3]
(ii)
State the approximate speed of radio waves in air.
speed = .................................................. m / s [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows successive crests of a wave after a plane wave has passed through a gap.
Fig. 5.1
(i)
© UCLES 2024
On Fig. 5.1 draw three successive crests before the wave reaches the gap.
0625/42/F/M/24
[2]
9
(ii)
Fig. 5.2 shows a much wider gap. A plane wave of the same wavelength as in (b)(i) is
incident on the gap from the left side of the barrier.
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2, draw three successive crests of the wave after the wave has passed through
the gap.
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a full‑scale diagram of an object O and its image I produced by a converging lens.
The lens and its position on the principal axis are not shown.
principal axis
O
I
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw:
•
•
a single ray to locate the position of the centre of the converging lens
a line to represent the position of the lens and label the line L.
[2]
(b) Determine the focal length of the lens by drawing another ray on Fig. 6.1.
focal length = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The object is moved 2.0 cm closer to the lens.
State two changes to the characteristics of the image.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
11
7
(a) Draw the circuit symbol for a potential divider.
[1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit.
Vout
Rout
R
1.0 kΩ
6.0 V
Fig. 7.1
(i)
Calculate the value of Vout when the value of R is 3.0 kΩ.
Vout = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The value of R is adjusted until the current in the circuit is 1.7 mA.
Calculate the charge that flows through the circuit in 300 s.
charge = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
12
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a wire carrying a large current.
large
current
square card
Fig. 8.1
(i)
Fig. 8.2 shows the square card viewed from above.
card
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw three magnetic field lines that indicate the direction of the magnetic
field and how its strength varies with distance from the wire.
[3]
(ii)
The current in the wire increases and the direction of the current is reversed.
State how these changes affect the magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
13
(b) Electricity is transmitted at high voltage.
Explain why a high voltage increases the efficiency of transmission even with thinner wires.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
14
9
(a) An experiment directs alpha particles at a very thin sheet of gold foil.
(i)
Most of the alpha particles pass through the thin foil in a straight line.
State the conclusion about atoms from this observation.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Some of the alpha particles are deflected through angles less than 90° and a few are
deflected through 180°.
State and explain two conclusions about the nuclei of atoms from this observation.
conclusion 1 ......................................................................................................................
explanation 1 .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
conclusion 2 ......................................................................................................................
explanation 2 .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A source contains a radioactive isotope of strontium. This isotope decays by emission of
β‑particles. The half‑life of this isotope is 29 years.
(i)
State the change in the nucleus which occurs when a β‑particle is emitted.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The initial mass of this isotope of strontium in the source is 25 µg.
Calculate the mass of the strontium isotope that decays in 87 years.
mass = ..................................................... µg [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
16
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 represents different positions A–H of the Moon as it rotates around the Earth.
A
H
G
B
Earth
C
light from
the Sun
D
F
E
Fig. 10.1
(i)
(ii)
State a position of the Moon where an observer on Earth sees:
1. there is a quarter Moon
............................................
2. there is a full Moon
............................................
[2]
State the approximate time taken for the Moon to orbit the Earth.
time = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
17
(b) The average distance of the Earth from the Sun is 1.5 × 108 km.
(i)
Calculate the average orbital speed of the Earth in km / h.
average orbital speed = ................................................ km / h [3]
(ii)
The speed of light in a vacuum is 3.0 × 108 m / s. Calculate the time taken for light from
the Sun to reach the Earth.
time = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
[Turn over
18
11
(a) State the condition required for a protostar to become a stable star.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i)
Define the Hubble constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The current estimate for the Hubble constant is 2.2 × 10–18 per second.
State the equation which gives an estimate for the age of the Universe.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Calculate an estimate for the age of the Universe.
estimate of age = ....................................................... s [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
0625/42/F/M/24
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 4 5 4 8 7 2 4 9 8 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (ST/CT) 194261/3
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
An aeroplane of mass 2.5 × 105 kg lands with a speed of 62 m / s, on a horizontal runway at time
t = 0. The aeroplane decelerates uniformly as it travels along the runway in a straight line until it
reaches a speed of 6.0 m / s at t = 35 s.
(a) Calculate:
(i)
the deceleration of the aeroplane in the 35 s after it lands
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
the resultant force acting on the aeroplane as it decelerates
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
the momentum of the aeroplane when its speed is 6.0 m / s.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) At t = 35 s, the aeroplane stops decelerating and moves along the runway at a constant speed
of 6.0 m / s for a further 15 s.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch the shape of the graph for the distance travelled by the aeroplane along
the runway between t = 0 and t = 50 s. You are not required to calculate distance values.
distance
0
0
35
50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[3]
3
(c) As the aeroplane decelerates, its kinetic energy decreases.
Suggest what happens to this energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 is the extension–load graph for a light spring S.
30
extension / cm
20
10
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
load / N
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the range of loads for which S obeys Hooke’s law.
from ....................................................... to .......................................................... [1]
(b) Using information from Fig. 2.1, determine the spring constant k of spring S.
k = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
5
(c) A second spring, identical to spring S, is attached to spring S. The two springs are attached
to a rod, as shown in Fig. 2.2. A load of 4.0 N is suspended from the bottom of spring S. The
arrangement is in equilibrium.
rod
second spring
spring S
4.0 N load
Fig. 2.2
(i)
State the name of the form of energy stored in the two springs when they are stretched.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Determine the extension of the arrangement in Fig. 2.2.
extension = ................................................... cm [1]
(iii)
The load is carefully increased to 6.0 N in total.
Calculate the distance moved by the load to the new equilibrium position as the load
increases from 4.0 N to 6.0 N.
distance moved = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows gas trapped in the sealed end of a tube by a dense liquid.
open end
trapped gas
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
sealed
end
dense liquid
Fig. 3.1
The scale marked on the sealed end of the tube is calibrated to read the volume of gas trapped
above the liquid surface. Fig. 3.1 shows that initially the volume V1 of the gas is 60 cm3.
The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
(a) State how Fig. 3.1 shows that the pressure of the trapped gas is equal to the pressure of the
atmosphere.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain, in terms of the momentum of its molecules, why the trapped gas exerts a pressure
on the walls of the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
7
(c) More of the dense liquid is poured into the open end of the tube. The level of the liquid surface
in both the sealed and the open ends of the tube rises as shown in Fig. 3.2. The temperature
of the trapped gas and atmospheric pressure both remain constant.
open end
15 cm
trapped gas
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
sealed
end
dense liquid
Fig. 3.2
(i)
In the sealed end of the tube, the volume V2 of the trapped gas is 50 cm3. In the open
end of the tube, the liquid surface is 15 cm above the new level in the sealed tube.
Calculate the pressure p2 of the trapped gas.
pressure p2 = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the density of the liquid in the tube.
density = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[Turn over
8
4
Water has a specific heat capacity of 4200 J / (kg °C) and a boiling point of 100 °C.
(a) State what is meant by boiling point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mass of 0.30 kg of water at its boiling point is poured into a copper container which is
initially at 11 °C. After a few seconds, the temperature of the container and the water are both
95 °C.
(i)
Calculate the energy transferred from the water.
energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the thermal capacity of the copper container.
thermal capacity of the copper container = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Water from the container evaporates and the temperature of the remaining water
decreases slowly.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining
water to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
9
5
The distance between the centre of a thin converging lens and each principal focus is 5.0 cm.
(a) Describe what is meant by the term principal focus for a thin converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The lens is used as a magnifying glass to produce an image I of an object O.
(i)
Underline the terms that describe the nature of the image produced by a magnifying
glass.
[2]
diminished
(ii)
enlarged
inverted
real
same size
upright
virtual
Fig. 5.1 is a full-scale diagram of the lens and the image I.
I
centre of lens
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 5.1 (full-scale)
(iii)
1.
On Fig. 5.1, mark both principal focuses and label each of them F.
2.
By drawing on Fig. 5.1, find the position of object O and add object O to the diagram.
[3]
[1]
Using Fig. 5.1, determine the distance of object O from the centre of the lens.
distance = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[Turn over
10
6
The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
(a) Calculate the range of wavelengths for sounds that are audible by a healthy human ear.
wavelengths range from ................................. to ................................. [2]
(b) Sound waves are longitudinal waves.
Describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Fig. 6.1 shows a band in front of a building.
Fig. 6.1
The drum produces a low frequency sound. Other musical instruments produce a high
frequency sound. These sounds are equally loud.
A young man at the side of the building hears the drum but not the high frequency sounds
from the other musical instruments.
Explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
11
7
An electromagnet consists of a solenoid X that is made of copper wire. The solenoid contains an
iron core.
(a) Explain why:
(i)
the structure of copper makes it a suitable material for the wire
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
iron is a suitable material for the core of an electromagnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows the electromagnet inside a second solenoid Y.
terminals of Y
solenoid X
iron core
solenoid Y
a.c. power supply
Fig. 7.1
(i)
Describe and explain what happens in solenoid Y when solenoid X is connected to an
alternating current (a.c.) power supply.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
A switch and a lamp are connected in series with the terminals of solenoid Y. When the
switch is closed, the lamp lights up at normal brightness.
Describe and explain what happens to the current in solenoid X when the switch is
closed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[Total: 9]
[Turn over
12
8
The power supply used in an electric vehicle contains 990 rechargeable cells each of electromotive
force (e.m.f.) 1.2 V.
The cells are contained in packs in which all the cells are in series with each other. The e.m.f. of
each pack is 54 V.
(a) Calculate the number of packs in the power supply.
number of packs = ......................................................... [2]
(b) When in use, each pack supplies a current of 3.5 A.
(i)
Calculate the rate at which each cell is transferring chemical energy to electrical energy.
rate of energy transfer = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The packs are connected in parallel to supply a large current to drive the electric vehicle.
Explain why it is necessary to use thick wires to carry this current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
13
9
(a) Describe how a digital signal differs from an analogue signal. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i)
In the appropriate box, draw the symbol for an AND gate and the symbol for an OR gate.
AND gate
OR gate
[1]
(ii)
State how the behaviour of an AND gate differs from that of an OR gate.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
[Turn over
14
(c) An arrangement of logic gates A, B and C is shown in Fig. 9.1. The arrangement has two
inputs, X and Y and two outputs P and Q.
A
B
X
P
Y
Q
C
Fig. 9.1
Output P of logic gate B has logic state 1 (high).
(i)
Determine the logic states of the two inputs of logic gate B.
upper input = ...............................................................
lower input = ...............................................................
[1]
(ii)
Determine and explain the logic state of output Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
logic state of Q = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
15
10 Fig. 10.1 represents a neutral atom of an isotope of element X.
Fig. 10.1
(a) State one similarity between this atom and a neutral atom of a different isotope of element X.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The isotope of element X is radioactive. It decays to form an isotope of element Y by emitting
a β-particle.
(i)
Using Fig. 10.1 deduce the nuclide notation for the isotope of Y produced by this decay.
nuclide notation:
(ii)
......
...... Y [3]
β-particles ionise the air they pass through less strongly than the same number of
α-particles.
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/M/J/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 1 2 0 4 7 0 8 0 0 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 12 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (ST/CT) 194263/3
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph of a person on a journey.
On the journey, he walks and then waits for a bus. He then travels by bus. He gets off the bus and
waits for two minutes. He then walks again. His journey takes 74 minutes.
50
speed
km / h
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) For the whole journey calculate:
(i)
the distance travelled
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
the average speed.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
3
(b) State and explain which feature of a speed–time graph shows acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain the acceleration of the person at time = 40 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a train.
Fig. 2.1
The total mass of the train and its passengers is 750 000 kg. The train is travelling at a speed of
84 m / s. The driver applies the brakes and the train takes 80 s to slow down to a speed of 42 m / s.
(a) Calculate the impulse applied to the train as it slows down.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the average resultant force applied to the train as it slows down.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest how the shape of the train helps it to travel at high speeds.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The train took 80 s to reduce its speed from 84 m / s to 42 m / s. Explain why, with the same
braking force, the train takes more than 80 s to reduce its speed from 42 m / s to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) On a wet day, the train travels a greater distance before it stops along the same track. The
train has the same speed of 84 m / s before the brakes are applied.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
5
3
(a) A solar panel receives energy from the Sun at a rate of 5.0 kW.
Thermal energy is transferred from the solar panel to water with an efficiency of 20%.
Cold water of mass 15 kg enters the solar panel every hour.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the temperature increase of the water.
temperature increase = .....................................................°C [4]
(b) State and explain one advantage and one disadvantage of heating the water in a solar panel
compared with heating the water in a coal-burning boiler.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer without a temperature scale.
The liquid inside the thermometer has a melting point of –39 °C.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe simple experiments to mark the positions of the fixed points on this liquid-in-glass
thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A scientist is measuring temperatures at the South Pole. These temperatures have a minimum
value of –90 °C.
State why the liquid used in the thermometer in Fig. 4.1 would not be suitable for this scientist.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State a design change that:
(i)
increases the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
increases the range of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State the property of the liquid which ensures that the scale on a liquid-in-glass thermometer
is linear.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows crests of a wave approaching a barrier where the wave is reflected.
direction of travel of wave
crest
barrier
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw three crests of the reflected wave.
[3]
(b) The wave has a wavelength of 36 cm and a speed of 1.2 m / s.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Complete the following sentences.
An echo is the name for a reflected .................................................................. wave.
The waves that form an echo are a type of longitudinal wave. Longitudinal waves are made
up of .................................................................. and rarefactions.
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows an arrangement of glass prisms inside a box. The angles of the prisms are
45°, 45° and 90°.
box
prism 1
incident
ray of light
wall
prism 2
eye
Fig. 6.1 (not to scale)
This is a device used to view objects that are behind a wall.
The incident ray of light undergoes total internal reflection in the prisms.
On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the device and show the ray as it emerges
from the box.
[3]
(b) Show that the refractive index of glass with a critical angle of 45° is 1.41.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
9
7
(a) A student makes a transformer that uses an alternating current (a.c.) supply with an
electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12.0 V to induce an output potential difference (p.d.) of 2.0 V.
The student is provided with two lengths of insulated wire and the U-shaped piece of iron
shown in Fig. 7.1.
iron
Fig. 7.1
(i)
Complete and label Fig. 7.1 to show the transformer connected to the supply and the
output from the transformer.
[3]
(ii)
Explain the function of the piece of iron in the transformer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
The output of the transformer is connected to a lamp. The current in the lamp is 100 mA.
The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Another transformer is used in a school laboratory to step down a mains supply with a p.d. of
110 V to 12 V. This transformer is mounted in a metal case.
State and explain an essential safety feature required for this arrangement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
[Turn over
10
8
(a) A light-emitting diode (LED) is a diode that emits light when there is a current in it. Draw a
circuit diagram showing an LED, connected so that it is lit, in series with a battery and a fixed
resistor. Use standard electrical symbols.
[4]
(b) The p.d. across the LED when lit is 3.1 V and the current in the LED is 0.030 A.
Calculate the value of the resistance of the LED when lit.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a power supply of e.m.f. 10.5 V connected in series with a lamp and a heater.
The p.d. across the lamp is 2.1 V and the current in the lamp is 1.5 A.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate:
(i)
the resistance of the heater
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
the power of the heater.
power = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
[Total: 10]
11
9
(a) Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for a NAND gate.
Table 9.1
input 1
input 2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
output
[1]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 9.1 contains two different types of gate, labelled X and Y.
A
B
C
X
E
X
Y
D
Fig. 9.1
Table 9.2 shows a partially completed truth table for this circuit.
Table 9.2
input
(i)
intermediate point
A
B
C
D
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
output
E
From Table 9.2, deduce the name of logic gate Y.
Ring your answer from the list.
AND
(ii)
NAND
NOR
Complete the truth table in Table 9.2.
NOT
OR
[1]
[2]
(c) There is a current of 3.0 A in a copper wire. Calculate how many electrons pass through the
copper wire every 60 s. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a vacuum tube with a radioactive source. The radioactive source emits α-particles,
β-particles and γ -rays. There is a very strong magnetic field between the N pole and the S pole of
the magnet.
lead cylinder with narrow
central hole
vacuum
radioactive source
N
S
α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
(a) The lead cylinder has a narrow central hole. State and explain the effect of the lead cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe the paths of the α-particles, β-particles and γ -rays as they pass through the magnetic
field. Explain your answers.
(i)
α-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
β-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
γ -rays
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/M/J/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 4 0 8 5 1 2 0 6 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (ST/CT) 194262/3
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows two speed–time graphs, A and B, and two distance–time graphs, C and D.
speed
speed
A
0
B
0
time
0
distance
distance
C
0
time
0
0
D
time
0
0
time
Fig. 1.1
Describe the motion shown by:
(i)
graph A ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
graph B ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
graph C .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
graph D. ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
3
2
A scientist fills a container with sea water. The container has dimensions 30 cm × 30 cm × 40 cm.
The density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the sea water in the container.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a submarine. The submarine is fully submerged in the sea.
hatch
top surface
submarine
Fig. 2.1
(i)
The atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa and the total pressure on the top surface of the
submarine is 500 kPa.
Calculate the depth of the top surface of the submarine below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
A hatch (an opening door) on the top surface of the submarine has an area of 0.62 m2.
Calculate the downward force on the hatch due to the total pressure on the top surface
of the submarine.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
[Turn over
4
3
In a double-decker bus there are two passenger compartments, one above the other.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a double-decker bus on a tilted platform.
top compartment
bottom compartment
platform
angle
Fig. 3.1
The platform is used to test the stability of the bus.
The angle the bus makes with the horizontal is gradually increased until the bus begins to
topple to the left.
Explain why the bus begins to topple.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are 30 passengers in the upper compartment of the bus and 2 passengers in the
bottom compartment of the bus.
State how this affects the stability of the bus and the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
5
(c) A bus is travelling along a straight road. The bus and the driver have a combined mass of
16 000 kg when there are no passengers in it. The bus has 73 passengers. The average
mass of each of the passengers is 65 kg.
(i)
Calculate the total mass of the bus, the driver and the 73 passengers.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The fully loaded bus accelerates uniformly from rest to a speed of 14 m / s. The time
taken to reach a speed of 14 m / s is 20 s.
Calculate the resultant force on the bus during the acceleration.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules, what happens when a liquid evaporates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows wet clothes drying on a washing line in an outside area.
washing line
Fig. 4.1
State two changes in the weather that help the wet clothes to dry more quickly.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
7
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a plastic cup. The cup contains sand, an electric heater and a thermometer.
thermometer
electric
heater
plastic
cup
sand
Fig. 5.1
The power of the heater is 50 W. The mass of the sand in the cup is 550 g. The initial
temperature of the sand is 20 °C. The heater is switched on for 2.0 minutes. The temperature
is recorded until the temperature stops increasing. The highest temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 33 °C.
(i)
Calculate the energy supplied by the heater.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of the sand, using your answer to (a)(i)
and the data in the question.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]
(iii)
Explain why the specific heat capacity of sand may be different from the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
[Turn over
8
(b) On a sunny day, the temperature of the sand on a beach is much higher than the temperature
of the sea.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
9
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a sound wave after reflection from a solid surface.
direction
of travel of
reflected
wave
solid surface
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw three crests of the incident wave.
[3]
(b) Tick four statements in the list below that are false for a sound wave that is audible to a
healthy human ear.
The wave is longitudinal.
The wave is transverse.
The frequency of the wave is 1 Hz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 kHz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 MHz.
The wave travels in a vacuum.
The wave could travel in aluminium.
[3]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of a sound wave in water.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows red light travelling from air into a prism made of diamond. The path of the red light
is incomplete.
40°
A
y
x
ray of
red light
diamond
Fig. 7.1 (not to scale)
(a) The refractive index of diamond is 2.42.
Calculate angle x.
angle x = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain the term total internal reflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The angle y is greater than the critical angle of diamond.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the path of the red light through and out of the prism after point A.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
11
8
(a) (i)
Describe what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a polystyrene ball covered with aluminium paint. The polystyrene ball is
suspended between two charged metal plates by an insulated thread.
insulated thread
negatively charged
metal plate
positively
charged
metal plate
polystyrene ball
covered with
aluminium paint
Fig. 8.1
The ball oscillates between the two charged plates.
Explain why the ball oscillates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) There is a current of 0.29 A in an electrical circuit.
Calculate the time taken for a charge of 15 C to flow through the electrical circuit.
time = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
[Turn over
12
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor. The coil rotates about the axis when
there is a current in the coil. The coil is connected to the rest of the circuit by the brushes.
axis
coil
S
N
brush
brush
+
–
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 9.1, draw a pair of arrows to show which way the coil rotates. Explain the direction
you have chosen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction in which electrons flow through the coil.
[1]
(iii)
Explain why the electrons flow in the direction you have shown in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
13
(b) State any difference each of the following changes makes to the rotation of the coil in
Fig. 9.1:
(i)
changing the polarity of the power supply to that shown in Fig. 9.2
–
+
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
changing the coil to the new coil shown in Fig. 9.3
original coil
new coil
Fig. 9.3
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
using a stronger magnetic field.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
[Turn over
14
10 (a) A radioactive nucleus of carbon decays to a nucleus of nitrogen by emitting a particle.
Complete the nuclide equation and state the name of the particle.
14 C
6
14 N + ..... X
7
.....
name of particle X ……………………………………………..
[3]
(b) A radiation detector in a laboratory records a reading of 10 counts / min. There are no
radioactive samples in the laboratory.
(i)
Explain why the radiation detector records a reading and suggest a possible source.
explanation ....................................................
source ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years. There are atoms of carbon-14 in all living
organisms.
An archaeologist digs up some ancient wood. In the same laboratory as in (b)(i), a
sample of this ancient wood gives a reading of 20 counts / min. An equivalent sample of
living wood gives a reading of 80 counts / min. It is suggested that the age of the ancient
sample is 11 400 years.
Do a calculation to check whether this suggestion is correct.
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/M/J/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 2 9 1 3 2 6 1 6 6 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (ST/JG) 198541/2
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
A skydiver of mass 76 kg is falling vertically in still air. At time t = 0, the skydiver opens his
parachute.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed–time graph for the skydiver from t = 0.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine:
(i)
the deceleration of the skydiver immediately after the parachute opens
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
the force due to air resistance acting on the skydiver immediately after the parachute
opens.
force = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the skydiver, his motion between t = 0 and t = 6.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain why opening the parachute cannot reduce the speed of the skydiver to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Total: 10]
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a wooden trolley of mass 1.2 kg at rest on the rough surface of a bench.
trolley
ball
Fig. 2.1
A ball of mass 0.52 g travels horizontally towards the trolley. The ball embeds itself in the wood of
the trolley. The trolley moves with an initial speed of 0.065 m / s.
(a) Calculate:
(i)
the impulse exerted on the trolley
impulse = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
the speed of the ball as it hits the trolley.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) As the trolley moves across the rough surface, it slows down and stops.
Explain, in terms of the work done, the energy change that takes place as the trolley slows
down.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are very difficult to compress.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device that uses liquid pressure to lift heavy boxes.
boxes
cylinder
piston
moving oil
oil
pump
Fig. 3.1
The boxes are lifted by pumping oil into the cylinder.
The force upwards on the piston due to the oil, and the force downwards on the piston due to
the air above the piston, combine to produce a constant force of 8800 N.
The pressure of the air is 1.0 × 105 Pa and the cross-sectional area of the bottom surface of
the piston is 0.016 m2.
(i)
Calculate the pressure of the oil at the bottom surface of the piston.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
5
(ii)
As the boxes are lifted, the depth of the oil increases.
Explain why the pump must exert an increasing pressure on the oil as the depth of the oil
increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
Suggest one reason why the force of 8800 N in (b) cannot lift boxes of weight 8800 N.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Turn over
6
4
An aluminium saucepan with a plastic handle contains cold water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the saucepan on a hotplate.
aluminium saucepan
plastic handle
water
hotplate
Fig. 4.1
(a) State why the pan is made from aluminium but the handle is made from plastic.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The hotplate is switched on and, as the temperature of the water increases, the internal
energy of the water increases.
(i)
State, in terms of molecules, what is meant by an increase in internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain, in terms of the atomic lattice and electrons, how thermal energy is transferred
through the aluminium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii)
Eventually, the water reaches boiling point. Thermal energy from the hotplate is still
being transferred to the water.
Explain, in terms of molecules, the effect of this thermal energy on the water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
7
(iv)
The mass of the water decreases by 0.11 kg in 300 s. The specific latent heat of
vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg.
Calculate the rate at which the water gains thermal energy.
rate of gain of energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows the structure of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
bulb
glass
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
°C
liquid
Fig. 5.1
The bulb of the thermometer is placed into a beaker of warm water. As the liquid expands, it
moves along the tube.
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands more than a solid when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A second thermometer has a larger bulb that contains more of the same liquid than the
thermometer shown in Fig. 5.1. It has a different scale. In every other way, it is identical.
(i)
Explain how the sensitivity of the second thermometer compares with the sensitivity of
the thermometer in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain how the range of the second thermometer compares with the range of the
thermometer in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
9
(d) (i)
State one everyday problem that is a result of thermal expansion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Suggest and explain one way of solving this problem.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram that represents a sound wave travelling in air.
direction of travel
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark two points, each at the centre of a different compression. Label both of the
points C.
[1]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Measure the diagram and determine the frequency of the sound.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
11
(c) The wave reaches a barrier. Fig. 6.2 shows the wave passing through a gap in the barrier.
barrier
direction of travel
Fig. 6.2
The frequency of the wave is increased to a value many times greater than the value obtained
in (b).
Describe and explain two ways in which a diagram representing the wave with the greater
frequency differs from Fig. 6.2.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Turn over
12
7
Fig. 7.1 represents an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
S
direction of
rotation
N
H
X
Y
Fig. 7.1
(a) A student rotates the handle H, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) between
terminals X and Y varies with time during two complete revolutions of the coil.
Fig. 7.2
[3]
(ii)
On Fig. 7.2, mark and label a point P, for the e.m.f. when the coil is horizontal, as shown
in Fig. 7.1.
[1]
(iii)
The student turns the handle more quickly.
State two ways in which the e.m.f. between terminals X and Y changes.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
13
(b) Terminals X and Y are connected to the primary coil of a transformer.
State and explain what happens in the transformer as the student turns the handle of the a.c.
generator.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain why the power losses in transmission cables are lower when electrical energy is
transmitted at higher voltages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
[Turn over
14
8
A student sets up a circuit that includes a 12 V battery, an 800 Ω resistor, a voltmeter and a
thermistor. Fig. 8.1 is an incomplete circuit diagram because the symbol for the thermistor is
missing.
800 Ω
12 V
P
V
Q
Fig. 8.1
The thermistor is connected between terminals P and Q.
(a) Complete Fig. 8.1 by drawing the symbol for a thermistor between terminals P and Q.
[1]
(b) The 12 V battery consists of eight identical cells connected in series.
Calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of each cell.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(c) The reading on the voltmeter is 8.0 V.
(i)
Determine the resistance of the thermistor.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
A few hours later, the student notices that the reading on the voltmeter is greater.
Explain what can be deduced from this observation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
15
9
There are three naturally occurring isotopes of hydrogen: hydrogen-1, hydrogen-2 and hydrogen-3.
.
The nuclide notation for hydrogen-1 is 1
1
H
(a) Write down the symbol, using nuclide notation, for:
hydrogen-2 ...................................
hydrogen-3. ..................................
[1]
(b) In a fusion reactor, a nucleus of hydrogen-2 and a nucleus of hydrogen-3 undergo fusion.
(i)
State what is meant by nuclear fusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The fusion reaction produces a free neutron and one other particle.
Write down, using nuclide notation, the equation that represents this reaction.
[3]
(c) Nuclear fusion in the Sun is the source of most but not all of the resources that are used to
generate electrical energy on Earth.
State two resources for which nuclear fusion in the Sun is not the source.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/M/J/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 8 7 2 9 6 7 8 8 0 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
May/June 2021
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages.
DC (ST/JG) 198540/2
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a sealed weather balloon which is stationary in still air.
weather
balloon
instruments
Fig. 1.1
State whether the overall density of the balloon and its instruments is greater than, less than,
or the same as the density of the surrounding air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) At night, the gas inside the balloon cools. The pressure of the air outside the balloon remains
the same.
(i)
State whether the balloon rises, falls or remains stationary.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
3
(c) An object is released from the balloon. It starts at rest and eventually reaches a constant
speed.
(i)
On the axes of Fig. 1.2, sketch a speed–time graph to show this motion.
speed
0
time
0
Fig. 1.2
(ii)
[3]
State the values of the initial acceleration and the final acceleration of the object.
initial acceleration ..............................................................................................................
final acceleration ...............................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Turn over
4
2
(a) Define the moment of a force.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows an object of negligible weight. The object is in equilibrium.
rope
object
pulley
pivot P
20 cm
50 kg
mass
12 cm
force F
Fig. 2.1
The object is free to rotate about its pivot P.
Calculate the value of force F.
F = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Describe an experiment involving vertical forces to show that there is no net moment on an
object in equilibrium. You may draw a diagram in the space provided.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Total: 6]
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows water flowing at very slow speed over a cliff edge.
water
cliff edge
15 m
rocks
Fig. 3.1
The water falls 15 m onto the rocks below.
(a) Show that the velocity of the water when it strikes the rocks is 17 m / s.
[4]
(b) 30 kg of water flows over the cliff edge every second.
Calculate the force exerted by the rocks on the falling water. Ignore any splashing.
force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Pollen particles are mixed into a liquid. They are seen to move when observed through a
microscope.
(i)
Describe this movement.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain this movement in terms of the molecules of the liquid and the pollen particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i)
Medical professionals sometimes rub ethanol over the skin of a patient. Ethanol
evaporates readily at room temperature and has a high specific latent heat of vaporisation.
State whether the patient experiences heating, cooling or neither at the site where the
ethanol is applied. Explain your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
State any effect on the rate of evaporation of ethanol when a fan blows air over the
patient’s skin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
7
5
(a) A machine delivers a hot drink in a plastic cup, which is uncomfortably hot to hold.
Fig. 5.1 shows the cup with the hot drink.
hot drink
plastic cup
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2a shows the cup with the hot drink and a holder for the sides of the cup.
Fig. 5.2b shows a cross-section through the holder. The holder is made from two strong paper
cylinders separated by a wavy piece of strong paper to make air gaps.
hot drink
holder
plastic cup
holder
Fig. 5.2a
Fig. 5.2b
Explain how using the holder makes it more comfortable to hold the cup.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A student carries out experiments on the cooling of the hot drink described in (a), with and
without the holder in place. He finds that the holder only reduces the rate of cooling slightly.
Suggest and explain another action that reduces the rate of cooling more effectively.
suggestion ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State the method of thermal energy transfer from a star through the vacuum of space.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of green light passing through a prism.
prism
ray of
green light
Fig. 6.1
A ray of blue light is directed towards the prism on the same path as the ray of green light.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of the blue light through and out of the prism.
[3]
(b) The wavelength of the blue light in air is 4.8 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of the blue light.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
9
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows two magnets and the gap between the N pole of one magnet and the S pole of
the other magnet.
N
S
N
S
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw three lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic field in the
gap.
[2]
(b) (i)
Fig. 7.2 is a repeat of Fig. 7.1 showing the two magnets.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of a plotting compass needle when it comes to rest in the
gap between the N pole and the S pole.
N
S
N
S
Fig. 7.2
(ii)
[1]
Explain why the needle comes to rest in this position.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe a method of demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
10
8
(a) Two identical radioactive sources emit α-particles and γ-rays into two vacuum tubes.
(i)
Fig. 8.1 shows two electrically charged plates on either side of one of the vacuum tubes.
plate at +2500 V
vacuum
source
initial path of
beam of α-particles
and γ-rays
plate at –2500 V
Fig. 8.1
Write the symbol α once in Table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the α-particles.
Write the symbol γ once in Table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the γ-rays.
Table 8.1
into page
out of page
no deflection
towards bottom of
page
towards top of
page
[2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
11
(ii)
Fig. 8.2 shows the poles of a very strong magnet on either side of the other vacuum
tube.
N pole of
strong magnet
source
N
initial path of
beam of α-particles
and γ-rays
S
vacuum
S pole of
strong magnet
Fig. 8.2
Write the symbol α once in Table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the α-particles.
Write the symbol γ once in Table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the γ-rays.
Table 8.2
into page
out of page
no deflection
towards bottom of
page
towards top of
page
[2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Turn over
12
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor with a split-ring commutator.
split-ring
brush
coil
N
S
X
Fig. 8.3
(i)
State and explain the direction of rotation of the coil as seen from point X.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
The coil rotates through 90° from the position shown.
State what happens to the moment in this position.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
The coil is rotated through 180° from the position shown. By considering the forces on
the coil, explain how the split-ring commutator enables the motor to turn continuously.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
13
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit.
M
A
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw two clearly labelled arrows to show the direction of the electron flow and
the direction of the conventional current in the circuit.
[2]
(b) The current in the motor is 13 A. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the number of electrons that pass through the motor every second.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Turn over
14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the potential difference–current graph for a circuit component K.
10.0
potential difference / V
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0
1.0
2.0
3.0 4.0 5.0
current / mA
6.0
Fig. 10.1
Calculate the resistance of component K when the current in it is 4.0 mA.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a circuit containing component K.
component K
point X
resistor R
Fig. 10.2
At low temperature, component K has a much greater resistance than resistor R.
At high temperature, component K has a much smaller resistance than resistor R.
State and explain the effect on the lamp when the temperature changes from very low to very
high.
Refer to the voltage at point X in your explanation.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State the name of component K.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
[Turn over
16
11
(a) A student investigates a radioactive substance in a laboratory.
Fig. 11.1 is a graph showing the count rate detected as the substance decays for 7.5 minutes.
count rate
counts / min
250
200
150
100
50
0
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
time / min
Fig. 11.1
The background radiation is 20 counts / min.
(i)
Determine the half-life of the substance.
half-life = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
Calculate the count rate detected at time = 9.6 minutes.
count rate = .......................................counts / min [2]
(b) The substance emits α-particles and γ-rays. The student suggests that it is safe to store the
substance in a plastic container of thickness 2 mm.
State and explain whether the student’s suggestion is correct.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/M/J/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 1 4 5 4 7 0 3 0 6 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (ST/JG) 198539/3
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a load suspended from a spring.
spring
load
Fig. 1.1
The value of the spring constant k of the spring is 0.20 N / cm. The spring reaches its limit of
proportionality when the load is 15 N.
(a) Calculate the extension of the spring when the load is 3.0 N.
extension = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain what is meant by the term limit of proportionality of the spring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) On Fig. 1.2, sketch an extension–load graph for a spring. Label the limit of proportionality with
the letter L on your graph.
extension
0
0
load
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[2]
3
(d) The load is pulled down a small distance below its equilibrium position to position A, as shown
in Fig. 1.3. The load then moves up and down between position A and position B in Fig. 1.3.
position B
position A
Fig. 1.3
Describe the energy transfers which occur as the load moves:
from position A to the equilibrium position
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
from the equilibrium position to position B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[Turn over
4
2
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows a bookshelf with two groups of books A and B on it. There are six books in
each group of books. All the books are identical. The mass of each book is 0.52 kg.
21 cm
1.3 cm
21 cm
30 cm
30 cm
1.3 cm
shelf
group A
of books
group B
of books
Fig. 2.1
(i)
Explain why the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group B is less than the
pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
Calculate the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group A.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
(b) A diver dives to a depth below the surface of the sea where the total pressure is 3.0 × 105 Pa.
The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of the sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
Calculate the depth of the diver below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
5
3
A car travels at constant speed v on a horizontal, straight road. The driver sees an obstacle on the
road ahead.
(a) The distance travelled in the time between the driver seeing the obstruction and applying the
brakes is the thinking distance.
Explain why the thinking distance is directly proportional to v.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When the brakes are applied, the car decelerates uniformly to rest. The frictional force applied
by the brakes is constant. The distance travelled between first applying the brakes and the
car stopping is the braking distance.
Explain why the braking distance is proportional to v 2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The car is travelling at 22 m / s.
(i)
The thinking distance is 15 m.
Calculate the time taken to travel the thinking distance.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The car has a mass of 1400 kg. The time taken for the car to stop after the brakes are
applied is 2.1 s.
Calculate the force required to stop the car in this time.
force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[Total: 8]
[Turn over
6
4
(a) (i)
Define specific latent heat of fusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
A cup of water contains 250 cm3 of water at a temperature of 0 °C. An identical cup
contains 250 cm3 of a mixture of ice and water at a temperature of 0 °C.
The temperature of the surrounding air is 20 °C.
State and explain which cup contains the liquid with the lower temperature after
10 minutes.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i)
On a hot day, sweat forms on a person’s skin and then evaporates.
Explain, in terms of molecules, how the evaporation of sweat cools the person.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
Explain why this process is more effective when a wind is blowing.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
7
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a wave on the sea approaching a harbour.
harbour walls
harbour
wave crests
Fig. 5.1
(i)
On Fig. 5.1, draw three wave crests in the harbour.
(ii)
Another harbour has a much wider gap between its walls.
[2]
Describe and explain how the pattern of wave crests in this harbour is different from the
pattern you have drawn in (i).
description ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[Turn over
8
(b) A sound wave of frequency 850 Hz travels through sea water. The speed of sound in sea
water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound wave in sea water.
wavelength = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
9
6
Fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram of a lens and an object O.
lens
O
Fig. 6.1
(a) The focal length of the lens is 3.5 cm.
On Fig. 6.1, mark and label with the letter F the positions of the two principal focuses.
[1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw three rays to locate the image. Draw an arrow to represent the image and
label the image I.
[3]
(c) State three properties of the image I.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) A student incorrectly states that this lens is being used as a magnifying glass.
(i)
State how the image produced by a magnifying glass is different from the image I.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The student moves the object O to a position P so that the lens shown in Fig. 6.1 acts as
a magnifying glass.
On Fig. 6.1, mark a possible position for P.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Define electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
P
Q
Fig. 7.1
The two lamps shown are identical. Each lamp has a potential difference (p.d.) of 3.0 V across
it and a current of 2.0 A in it. PQ is a length of uniform metal wire. The resistance of PQ is R.
(i)
Calculate the value of R.
R = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
Another piece of wire is made of the same metal as PQ. The length of the new piece
of wire is twice the length of PQ. The diameter of the new piece of wire is twice the
diameter of PQ.
Calculate the resistance of the new piece of wire.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
11
8
(a) State the difference between an analogue signal and a digital signal. You may draw a diagram
to help explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[Turn over
12
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a combination of logic gates X, Y and Z. The gates are not represented by the
standard symbols.
A
logic
gate
X
B
C
D
logic
gate
Y
logic
gate
Z
E
F
Fig. 8.1
Table 8.1 shows a partly completed truth table for this combination of logic gates.
Table 8.1
intermediate
points
inputs
(i)
A
B
C
D
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
output
F
From Table 8.1, deduce:
1. the name of logic gate X
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. the name of logic gate Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Logic gate Z is a NAND gate.
Complete column F of Table 8.1.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
13
9
(a) An X-ray machine requires a supply of 110 kV. The mains electricity supply is 230 V. A
transformer is used to supply the correct voltage to the X-ray machine. There are 50 turns on
the primary coil of the transformer.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-down transformer. On the labels, state a suitable material
for each of the components.
[3]
(c) Explain how a transformer operates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
[Turn over
14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a beam of radiation in a vacuum. The beam contains α-particles, β-particles
and γ-rays.
region of uniform
magnetic field out of the page
beam of radiation,
containing α, β and
γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
The beam enters a region where there is a strong, uniform magnetic field. The direction of the
magnetic field is out of the page.
On Fig. 10.1, mark and label the paths through the magnetic field of:
(i)
α-particles (label this path α)
[1]
(ii)
β-particles (label this path β)
[2]
(iii)
γ-rays (label this path γ).
[1]
(b) Radioactive sources have many uses in medicine.
State two safety precautions which hospital staff take when working with γ-ray sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
15
(c) The radioactive isotope iodine-131 is used as a tracer in medical diagnosis. A nucleus of
iodine-131 contains 53 protons and 78 neutrons. The symbol for iodine is I.
(i)
(ii)
Use nuclide notation to show this isotope of iodine.
Iodine-131 emits γ-radiation. It has a half-life of 8 hours.
[1]
Explain why this emission and this half-life make iodine-131 a suitable material for a
tracer in medical diagnosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/M/J/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 9 0 5 3 9 4 8 9 8 5 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
May/June 2022
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages.
DC (LK/SW) 214895/1
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
A car of mass m is travelling along a straight, horizontal road at a constant speed v.
At time t = 0, the driver of the car sees an obstruction in the road ahead of the car and applies the
brakes.
The car does not begin to decelerate at t = 0.
(a) Explain what is meant by deceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest one reason why the car does not begin to decelerate at t = 0.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 1.1 is the distance–time graph for the car from t = 0.
60
distance / m
40
20
0
0
1
2
3
4
time / s
5
Fig. 1.1
(i)
State the property of a distance–time graph that corresponds to speed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Using Fig. 1.1, determine the initial speed v of the car.
v = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
3
(d) When the car is decelerating, there is a constant resistive force F on the car due to the
brakes.
F and is not constant.
The deceleration of the car is greater than m
Explain why:
(i)
F
the deceleration of the car is greater than m
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the deceleration is not constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows water stored in a reservoir behind a hydroelectric dam.
reservoir
150 m
generator
turbine
Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the water in the reservoir that is used to generate
electricity.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The turbine is 150 m below the level of the water in the reservoir.
Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i)
Calculate the total pressure in the water at the turbine.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
5
(ii)
The turbine has a cross-sectional area of 3.5 m2.
Calculate the force exerted on the turbine by the water.
force = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The water flows to the turbine through a pipe of constant cross-sectional area.
Explain why the kinetic energy of the water in the pipe remains constant as it flows through
the pipe.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
6
3
During a picnic on a warm, dry day, a metal can of lemonade is wrapped in a damp cloth.
Evaporation cools the water in the cloth.
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how evaporation cools the water in the cloth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) As the water in the cloth cools, so does the lemonade.
Explain how electrons transfer thermal energy through the metal of the can.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
7
4
A thermocouple is a device that is used as a thermometer.
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a beaker that contains molten sulfur at an initial temperature greater than
400 °C.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, sketch and label a diagram of a thermocouple that is used to determine the
temperature of the sulfur as it cools to room temperature.
sulfur
Fig. 4.1
(ii)
[4]
Describe briefly how the temperature of the sulfur in the beaker is deduced.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State one advantage of using a thermocouple to measure temperature rather than using a
liquid-in-glass thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a kitchen tap that supplies instant boiling water.
Fig. 5.1
Cold water passes over an electric immersion heater inside the tap.
The boiling point of water is 100 °C.
(a) State what is meant by boiling point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The immersion heater is powered by the mains at a voltage of 230 V. When the tap is opened,
the heater switches on and the current in the heater is 13 A.
(i)
Calculate the thermal energy produced by the heater in 60 s.
thermal energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The cold water that enters the tap
is at 22 °C.
Calculate the rate at which water at its boiling point emerges from the tap.
rate = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
9
(c) The metal tap is earthed and there is a fuse in the cable that connects the heater to the
mains.
1.
Explain how the earth wire protects the user.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2.
Explain how the fuse protects the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a road next to the sea.
Fig. 6.1
(a) On a sunny day, the Sun warms the road.
Describe how energy from the Sun reaches the Earth and warms the road.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The temperature of the road is greater than the temperature of the sea.
The surface of the road is black.
Suggest one reason why the temperature of the road is greater than that of the sea.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The air above the road is heated by the warm road.
(i)
Describe how this affects the molecules of the air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
11
(ii)
A cyclist travelling along the road notices that a cool breeze is blowing from the sea to
the land.
Explain how convection produces this breeze. You may include a diagram if it helps your
answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
12
7
Fig. 7.1 is a full-scale diagram of a small nail N in front of a thin converging lens. The line L
represents the lens.
L
N
X
Y
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 7.1 (full scale)
The focal length of the lens is 3.0 cm.
(a) Rays of light, parallel to XY, are travelling towards the lens.
Describe what happens to the light after it passes through the lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, mark and label with an F each of the two principal focuses of the lens.
[1]
(c) The small nail N, of height 1.2 cm, is positioned 2.0 cm to the left of the lens.
(i)
By drawing on Fig. 7.1, find the position of the image I of N and add image I to the
diagram.
[3]
(ii)
State and explain whether I is a real or a virtual image.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
State the name given to a lens when it is used in this way.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
13
8
Fig. 8.1 shows two vertical, cylindrical tubes and a cylindrical magnet all held in a vacuum.
cylindrical
magnet
plastic tube
copper tube
Fig. 8.1 (not to scale)
One tube is made of plastic and the other tube is made of copper. The two cylindrical tubes have
identical dimensions.
The magnetic field of the small, cylindrical magnet is extremely strong.
Initially, the magnet is at rest at the top of the plastic tube.
The magnet is released and it falls through the plastic tube without experiencing a resistive force.
The magnet takes 0.67 s to fall to the lower end of the plastic tube.
(a) The mass of the magnet is 0.012 kg.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the magnet when it reaches the lower end of the plastic tube.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [4]
(b) The magnet is then held at the top of the copper tube and released. As it falls through the
copper tube, an electric current is generated in the copper.
(i)
Explain why there is a current in the copper.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
14
(ii)
The current in the copper produces a magnetic field of its own in the tube.
The magnet falls much more slowly in the copper tube than in the plastic tube.
Explain why the magnet falls more slowly in the copper tube.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
15
9
Combinations of logic gates are used when digital signals are processed.
(a) Describe the difference between a digital signal and an analogue signal. You may include a
diagram if it helps your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 9.1 is the truth table for a logic gate X.
input A
input B
output
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
Fig. 9.1
State the name of logic gate X and draw the symbol that represents it.
name .........................................................................................................................................
symbol
[1]
(c) Logic gate Y is identical to logic gate X.
Draw a combination of logic gates X and Y that behaves like an OR gate. Label the inputs A
and B and label the output Q.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
[Turn over
16
10 Two of the isotopes of hydrogen are hydrogen-2 ( 12H ) and hydrogen-3 ( 13H ).
(a) (i)
State one similarity in the composition of their nuclei.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe how a nucleus of hydrogen-3 differs from a nucleus of hydrogen-2.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In a nuclear fusion reactor, a nucleus of hydrogen-2 fuses with a nucleus of hydrogen-3 at
an extremely high temperature. This fusion reaction produces an isotope of element X and
releases a neutron.
(i)
Explain why an extremely high temperature is needed when forcing these two nuclei
together.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
Using nuclide notation, complete the equation for this reaction.
2
1H
+
3
1H
[2]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/M/J/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 2 9 6 1 5 9 9 1 2 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (KS/FC) 301887/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows an electrically powered bicycle.
battery
electric motor
Fig. 1.1
When fully charged, the battery can deliver a power of 600 W for 60 min.
(a) (i)
Calculate the energy, in joules, stored in the battery when fully charged.
energy = ...................................................... J [3]
(ii)
State the form of energy stored by the battery.
.........................................................
[1]
(b) The bicycle has a motor with an electrical input power of 250 W.
Calculate the time for which the battery can power the bicycle.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Consider this bicycle compared to a small motorcycle.
State two environmental benefits of the electrically powered bicycle.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows an object of mass 2.0 kg on a bench. This object is connected by a cord, passing
over a pulley, to an object of mass 3.0 kg.
pulley
cord
card
2.0 cm
2.0 kg object
F
bench
3.0 kg object
Fig. 2.1
The 2.0 kg object is released from rest and accelerates at 4.0 m / s2.
(a) Calculate the resultant force acting on the 2.0 kg object.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the upward force F exerted by the cord on the 3.0 kg object.
force F = ......................................................... [3]
(c) The objects have a constant acceleration.
(i)
Show that the speed of the objects 0.80 s after release is 3.2 m / s.
[2]
(ii)
A card, of width 2.0 cm, is fixed to the 2.0 kg object. As the 2.0 kg object moves to the left,
the card passes through a beam of light that is perpendicular to the card.
Using the speed given in (c)(i), calculate the time taken for the card to pass through the
beam of light.
time = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows water in a river moving parallel to the river bank at 4.0 m / s and a canoe
travelling in the river.
river bank
38°
canoe travels at 2.5 m / s
relative to the water
water moving at 4.0 m / s
river bank
Fig. 3.1
The canoe travels at 2.5 m / s relative to the water and heads at an angle of 38° to the river
bank.
Draw a scale diagram to determine the canoe’s resultant velocity and state the scale you
used.
scale ...............................................................
magnitude of resultant velocity ...............................................................
direction of resultant velocity (angle from the river bank) ...............................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
5
(b) The mass of the canoeist is 65 kg.
Calculate her kinetic energy when travelling on still water at 2.5 m / s.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
6
4
(a) State and explain the two features of a liquid-in-glass thermometer that are necessary for
linearity.
statement 1 ...............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
statement 2 ...............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The value of the heat capacity of the hot junction of a thermocouple thermometer is important
in ensuring that it can measure temperature changes very rapidly.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The hot junction of a thermocouple thermometer has a heat capacity of 0.11 J / °C.
Calculate the thermal energy required to increase the temperature of the hot junction from
20 °C to 345 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
7
5
Sound waves are longitudinal and electromagnetic waves are transverse.
(a) A sound wave used for a medical examination has a frequency of 1.5 MHz.
(i)
State and explain what type of sound wave this is.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The wave travels through soft human tissue at a speed of 1.3 km / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave in soft human tissue.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Describe one use of X-rays in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 is a full-size ray diagram showing the formation of an image by a thin glass lens.
Fig. 6.1 (full size)
(a) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Circle three items in the list which describe the nature of the image formed.
enlarged
same size
diminished
upright
real
virtual
inverted
[3]
(c) State one feature of a virtual image.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
9
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a small plotting compass which is aligned with the magnetic field between magnetic
poles A and B of a U-shaped magnet.
A
S
N
B
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the polarity of the poles.
pole A ........................................................................................................................................
pole B .......................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a wire, placed between two poles, carrying a current in the direction of the
arrow.
S
N
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire due to the magnetic
field.
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
11
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows a β-particle moving in the direction of the arrow between the same two poles.
β-particle
N
S
direction of travel of β-particle
when in the position shown
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the β-particle due to the
magnetic field.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a 60 Hz alternating current (a.c.) power
supply varies with time.
e.m.f.
0
0
time
time period
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate the time period of the a.c.
time period = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows this power supply connected in a circuit.
A
B
C
Fig. 8.2
(i)
State the name of component A.
.......................................................... [1]
(ii)
In each time period of the a.c., 1.5 × 1017 electrons pass through component A. The
charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the average current in the circuit during one time period.
current = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
13
(c) On Fig. 8.3:
1. mark, with an arrow labelled E, the direction of the electron flow through component B
2. mark, with an arrow labelled I, the direction of the conventional current in component C.
A
B
C
Fig. 8.3
[2]
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a circuit with components B and C connected to a direct current (d.c.) power
supply of e.m.f. 12 V.
B
C
Fig. 8.4
The current in the circuit is 0.35 A.
Calculate the power delivered by the power supply to the circuit.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with a 3-position switch.
12 V
C
B
X
A
Y
M
Fig. 9.1
The moving part of the switch is always connected to point Y around which it pivots. The other end
of the moving part, labelled X, can be connected to one of the points A, B or C.
(a) The resistance of the motor is 2.0 Ω and the resistance of the resistor is 3.0 Ω.
Determine the current in the motor when the switch is connected to:
(i)
point A
current = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
point B
current = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
point C.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Two resistors of resistance 2.0 Ω and 3.0 Ω are connected in parallel.
Calculate the combined resistance of the resistors in this arrangement.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
15
10 Fig. 10.1 is a simplified diagram of a digital circuit. The output of logic gate Y controls a buzzer.
logic gate X
input
A
input
B
logic gate Y
Fig. 10.1
(a) Complete Table 10.1, the truth table for the circuit.
Table 10.1
input A
input B
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
output of X
output of Y
[3]
(b) Input A is the output of a humidity sensor which gives logic 1 when the humidity is high and
logic 0 when the humidity is low.
Input B is the output of a light sensor which gives logic 1 in bright light and logic 0 in darkness.
The buzzer sounds when the output of Y is logic 1.
State the conditions of humidity and light when the buzzer is on.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The output of the digital circuit alone is not able to operate the buzzer.
Ring the component from the list that must be connected between the output of the digital
circuit and the buzzer.
fuse
heater
relay
resistor
thermistor
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
[Turn over
16
11
(a) Fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three α-particles moving towards a thin gold foil. Four gold nuclei
are shown.
gold nuclei
paths of
α-particles
Fig. 11.1 (not to scale)
(i)
On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles.
(ii)
State the sign of the charge on the α-particles.
[3]
.......................................................... [1]
(b) The nuclide notation for a nucleus of gold-198 is
198
Au.
79
State the numbers of electrons, neutrons and protons in a neutral atom of gold-198.
number of electrons = .............................
number of neutrons = .............................
number of protons = ...............................
[3]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/M/J/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 2 0 5 6 1 2 3 3 8 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (RW/JG) 301888/3
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
A battery provides energy to an electric car.
(a) The electric car has an acceleration of 2.9 m / s2 when it moves from rest.
The combined mass of the car and its driver is 1600 kg.
(i)
Calculate the time taken to reach a speed of 28 m / s.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the force required to produce this acceleration.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Calculate the kinetic energy of the car when its speed is 28 m / s.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The time taken for the car battery to be recharged from zero charge to full charge is 8.3 h.
The charge is delivered to the battery by a charger with a current of 32 A.
Calculate the charge supplied by the charger.
charge = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Under ideal conditions, the car can travel a maximum distance of 390 km when the battery is
fully charged.
Suggest why, in normal use, the car needs to be recharged after travelling less than 390 km.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
3
2
Water is held behind a dam in a hydroelectric power scheme.
(a) State the main form of energy stored in the water behind the dam.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The water is released from the dam and falls a vertical height of 410 m at a rate of 480 kg / s.
(i)
Calculate the rate at which energy is transferred by the falling water.
rate of energy transfer = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
The power scheme supplies a current of 270 A at a voltage of 6000 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the power scheme.
efficiency = ......................................................% [3]
(c) Hydroelectric energy is a renewable form of energy.
(i)
State one disadvantage of hydroelectric power schemes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State one other renewable source of energy.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a boat stored in a shed. The boat is suspended from the ceiling of the shed by
two ropes.
ceiling
60°
T
60°
ropes
T
boat
Fig. 3.1
The tension T in each of the ropes is 75 N.
(i)
Draw a vector diagram to determine the resultant of the forces exerted by the two ropes
on the boat. State the scale you used.
scale = ...............................................................
magnitude of resultant force = ...............................................................
direction of resultant force = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
5
(ii)
Determine the mass of the boat.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Force is a vector.
Draw a circle around two other quantities in the list which are vectors.
acceleration
momentum
density
power
energy
refractive index
mass
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles (Brownian motion).
microscope
glass cover
smoke
glass cell
Fig. 4.1
The glass cell has light shining on it from the side.
The smoke particles are seen as bright specks of light when looking through the microscope.
(i)
Draw the path of one of the bright specks of light.
[2]
(ii)
Explain, in terms of forces and the motion of air molecules, the cause of the motion of
the smoke particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The temperature of the air in a sealed glass container is increased.
(i)
Explain, in terms of molecules, why the internal energy of the air increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the air also increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
7
5
(a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A bowl contains 500 cm3 of water at a temperature of 5.0 °C. The bowl of water is placed in
a freezer for several hours. When the bowl is removed from the freezer, it contains ice at a
temperature of –18.0 °C. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i)
Calculate the mass of water in the bowl when it is placed in the freezer.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The specific heat capacity of ice is
2100 J / (kg °C). The specific latent heat of fusion of water is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the energy given out as the water cools from 5.0 °C to ice at –18.0 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
[Turn over
8
6
(a) (i)
Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a plane water wave approaching a barrier with a gap.
crests
barrier
direction of travel
of water wave
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw three crests of the water wave to the right of the barrier.
(ii)
[2]
Fig. 6.2 shows crests of a plane water wave in deep water approaching a region of
shallow water.
boundary
direction of travel
of water wave
deep
water
shallow
water
Fig. 6.2
The water wave moves more slowly in shallow water.
On Fig. 6.2, draw:
© UCLES 2022
1.
three crests of the water wave in the shallow water
[2]
2.
the direction of travel of the wave in the shallow water.
[1]
0625/43/M/J/22
9
(b) State two ways in which transverse waves differ from longitudinal waves.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i)
State a typical value of the speed of sound in water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why sound travels faster in water than in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a plan view of a room. There is a plane mirror on one wall and a picture across
the whole of wall AB.
plane mirror
A
X
B
Fig. 7.1 (plan view)
A person is standing at point X and is looking at the mirror. The person cannot see all of the
picture on wall AB reflected in the mirror.
There is a point P on wall AB which is the closest point to A that the person can see reflected
in the mirror.
On Fig. 7.1, draw a reflected ray and an incident ray to show the position of the point P.
[2]
(b) State two properties of the image formed by the mirror.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Visible light is an electromagnetic wave.
State the name of one region of the electromagnetic spectrum in which the waves have:
(i)
shorter wavelengths than visible light
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
longer wavelengths than visible light.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
11
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
X
Y
Fig. 8.1
(i)
State the name of component X.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The potential difference (p.d.) across component Y is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for the voltmeter and its connections to the circuit.
(iii)
[1]
The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is 12 V.
Component Y has a resistance of 400 Ω.
In a brightly lit room, the resistance of component X is 350 Ω.
1.
Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ......................................................... [2]
2.
Calculate the p.d. across component Y.
p.d. = ......................................................... [1]
(iv)
In a dark room, the resistance of component X is very large.
State the effect this will have on the p.d. across component Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Suggest a practical use for component X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a magnet on the end of a spring and a coil of wire connected to a sensitive
centre-zero galvanometer. The magnet can move freely through the coil.
spring
coil of wire
N
centre-zero
galvanometer
S
Fig. 9.1
(i)
The magnet is pulled down and released.
Describe and explain what happens to the needle of the sensitive galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii)
The magnet is replaced with a stronger magnet.
State the effect of using a stronger magnet on what happens to the needle of the
galvanometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
13
(b) A step-up transformer is used to step up the output voltage of a power station from 25 000 V
to 400 000 V for transmission along power lines.
The number of turns on the secondary coil is 36 000.
Calculate the number of turns on the primary coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
[Turn over
14
10 A student places a sample of an isotope of protactinium (Pa-234) near a radiation detector.
The readings on the detector, taken every 20 s, are recorded in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1
time / s
count rate
counts / min
0
101
20
88
40
76
60
66
80
58
100
51
120
46
140
42
160
38
180
35
Fig. 10.1 shows a graph of the count rate due to this sample against time.
count rate
counts / min
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180
time / s
Fig. 10.1
(a) Explain why the readings in Table 10.1 are not the same as those plotted on the graph.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
15
(b) Using the graph in Fig. 10.1, determine the half-life of this isotope of protactinium.
half-life = ....................................................... s [2]
234
(c) The nuclide notation for this isotope of protactinium is 91Pa.
Protactinium-234 decays to an isotope of uranium (U) by β-emission.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay of protactinium-234.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/M/J/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 4 2 9 1 0 4 8 9 6 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CE/CB) 315742/3
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a straight section of a river where the water is flowing from right to left at a speed of
0.54 m / s.
river
current
0.54 m / s
P
swimmer
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
A swimmer starts at point P and swims at a constant speed of 0.72 m / s relative to the water and at
right angles to the current.
(a) (i)
Determine, relative to the river bank, both the magnitude and direction of the swimmer’s
velocity.
magnitude of velocity = ...............................................................
direction of velocity ...............................................................
[4]
(ii)
After 1.5 minutes, the swimmer reaches point Q.
Calculate the distance between P and Q.
distance = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
3
(b) When the swimmer is crossing the river, his actions produce a constant forward force on his
body.
Explain why he moves at a constant speed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a motorcyclist accelerating along a straight horizontal section of track.
Fig. 2.1
The motorcyclist and motorcycle have a combined mass of 240 kg.
(a) On the straight horizontal section of the track, the motorcyclist accelerates from rest at
7.2 m / s2.
(i)
The motorcyclist reaches the end of the straight section of track in 5.3 s.
Calculate the speed of the motorcyclist at the end of the straight section.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the resultant force on the motorcyclist and motorcycle on the straight section
of track.
resultant force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
5
(b) At the end of the straight section, the track remains horizontal but bends to the right, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
When the motorcyclist reaches the bend, she travels around the bend in a circular path at a
constant speed.
(i)
Velocity is a vector quantity.
State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe what happens to the velocity of the motorcyclist as she travels around the bend
at constant speed.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Explain why there must be a resultant force on the motorcyclist as she travels around the
bend.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
6
3
A rubber balloon is inflated with helium and sealed so that no helium escapes.
The balloon is positioned immediately below the ceiling in a room.
Heaters are switched on and the temperature of the air in the room increases.
(a) When the heaters are first switched on, the temperature of the air immediately below the
ceiling increases more quickly than the temperature of the air in the rest of the room.
Explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The temperature of the helium in the balloon increases and as the rubber stretches, the
volume occupied by the helium increases.
(i)
State what happens to the motion of the helium particles as the temperature increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
As the rubber stretches and the volume of the helium increases, the pressure of the
helium remains constant.
Explain, in terms of the particles of helium, how the pressure of the helium remains
constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
7
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
8
4
A student investigates the efficiency of a filament lamp. Fig. 4.1 shows the filament lamp with its
glass bulb immersed in water in a beaker.
thermometer
to power supply
water
beaker
filament lamp
Fig. 4.1
The reading on the thermometer in the water is 19.0 °C.
Only the glass of the lamp is in contact with the water and the electrical connections are completely
insulated.
The lamp is switched on.
At the end of the experiment, the temperature of the water is 21.5 °C.
(a) The mass of the water in the beaker is 600 g and the specific heat capacity of water is
4200 J / (kg °C).
(i)
Show that the increase in the internal energy of the water is 6300 J.
[3]
(ii)
In the experiment, the lamp is switched on for 500 s. The power supplied to the filament
lamp is 13 W. The useful energy from the lamp is transferred as light. The energy that
increases the temperature of the water is wasted energy.
Determine the maximum possible efficiency of the filament lamp.
maximum possible efficiency = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
9
(b) The efficiency of the lamp is less than the value determined in (a)(ii).
Suggest one reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
10
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a block ABCD made of glass that has a refractive index of 1.5. The block has one
curved side AB and three straight sides, BC, CD and DA.
B
monochromatic light
glass block
P
A
θ
D
air
C
Fig. 5.1
There are right angles at C and D. The curved side AB is one quarter of the circumference of a
circle that has its centre at point P.
A ray of monochromatic light enters the block through the curved side AB and strikes side BC at P.
Some light emerges into the air and some is reflected.
(a) State what is meant by monochromatic.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain why the ray of light does not change direction when it enters the block through side
AB.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Show that the critical angle c for glass of refractive index 1.5 is 42°.
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
11
(d) Fig. 5.1 shows that the angle between the ray of light and line AP is θ, where line AP is at right
angles to side BC.
Angle θ increases to 45°.
(i)
State and explain what happens to the light that strikes P.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
When θ = 45°, the reflected light strikes side CD.
Describe what happens when this reflected light strikes side CD.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
12
6
A mobile phone (cell phone) network uses microwaves of frequency 1.9 × 109 Hz to transmit and
receive signals.
The speed of microwaves in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
(a) Calculate the wavelength of these microwaves in air.
wavelength = ......................................................... [2]
(b) State two reasons why microwaves are used for mobile phone (cell phone) signals.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) All mobile phone (cell phone) networks use digital signals to communicate with the phone.
(i)
Describe, with the aid of a diagram, how a digital signal differs from an analogue signal.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
State two advantages of using digital signals rather than analogue signals.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
13
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit that contains a battery, a switch, a voltmeter and three 40 Ω resistors, R1,
R2 and R3.
R1
R3
V
R2
Fig. 7.1
The switch is open and resistors R1 and R2 form a potential divider.
(a) Describe what is meant by a potential divider.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The reading on the voltmeter is 7.5 V.
(i)
Calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
The switch is closed.
Calculate the resistance of the complete circuit.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter when the switch is closed.
reading = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
14
8
The electricity supplied to a town is transmitted using a high-voltage cable. A transformer in the
town has a soft-iron core.
(a) Explain the principle of operation of a simple iron-cored transformer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) The transformer steps the supply voltage down from 220 000 V to 33 000 V.
(i)
There are 450 turns on the secondary coil.
Calculate the number of turns on the primary coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The electrical power transferred to the transformer by the high-voltage cable is 77 MW.
Calculate the current in the primary coil.
current = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
16
9
Fig. 9.1 represents all the particles in a neutral atom of a radioactive isotope X1.
Fig. 9.1 (not to scale)
(a) Determine the number of neutrons in this atom and explain how the answer is obtained.
number of neutrons = ...............................................................
explanation
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The isotope X1 is a beta emitter that decays to the stable isotope X2.
(i)
Describe how a nucleus of X2 differs from a nucleus of X1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Suggest why isotope X2 is stable whereas X1 is not stable.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
17
(c) The half-life of X1 is approximately 20 ms.
(i)
Define the term half-life.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Suggest one reason why isotopes with very short half-lives are especially hazardous.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
[Turn over
18
10 Pluto is a dwarf planet. Fig. 10.1 shows the direction of motion of Pluto as it follows its elliptical
orbit around the Sun.
Pluto
X
Sun
Y
orbit
direction
of motion
Fig. 10.1 (not to scale)
(a) Point X is the point in the orbit closest to the Sun and point Y is the point furthest away.
The orbital speed of Pluto varies as it orbits the Sun.
(i)
Describe how the speed of Pluto varies as it moves from X to Y and then back to X.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain, in terms of energy transfers, why the speed of Pluto varies in this way.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
19
(b) The average temperature on the surface of Pluto is 43 K.
(i)
Convert this temperature to a value in degrees Celsius (°C).
temperature = .................................................... °C [1]
(ii)
Pluto has a white surface, as shown in Fig. 10.2. As Pluto rotates, the white surface
alternately faces towards and away from the Sun.
white surface
Fig. 10.2
Explain how this affects the temperature of Pluto as it rotates on its own axis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/M/J/23
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 0 5 6 9 0 7 9 5 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CE/CT) 315744/3
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a helicopter which is stationary at a height of 1500 m above the ground.
1500 m
ground
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
(i)
State the two conditions necessary for the helicopter to remain in equilibrium.
condition 1 .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
condition 2 .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
The mass of the helicopter is 3200 kg.
Calculate the change in the gravitational potential energy of the helicopter as it rises
from the ground to 1500 m.
change in gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows a vertical speed–time graph for a parachutist who jumps from a stationary
hot-air balloon.
A
speed
B
0
0
time
Fig. 1.2
The parachutist jumps from the balloon at time = 0 and reaches the ground at B. The point A
indicates when the parachute opens.
(i)
(ii)
On Fig. 1.2, label a point on the graph where the acceleration is:
•
zero with ‘1’
•
negative with ‘2’
•
decreasing with ‘3’.
[3]
Explain, in terms of forces, the changes in motion which occur from when the parachutist
leaves the hot-air balloon until point A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[Turn over
4
2
A student catches a cricket ball. The speed of the ball immediately before it is caught is 18 m / s.
The mass of the cricket ball is 160 g.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy stored in the cricket ball immediately before it is caught.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
(b) It takes 0.12 s to catch the ball and bring it to rest.
Calculate the average force exerted on the ball.
average force = ......................................................... [2]
(c) As the student catches the ball, she moves her hands backwards.
Explain the effect of this action on the student’s hands.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
5
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a person moving across an ice-covered pond to reach a ball on the ice.
ball
ice
Fig. 3.1
Explain why this way of moving across the ice is safer than walking. Use your understanding
of pressure in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a side view of the pond with a layer of ice floating freely on the water.
ice
pond
0.45 m
X
water
Fig. 3.2
The surface area of the pond is 5.0 m2.
The mass of the ice is 690 kg.
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Point X is 0.45 m below the ice.
Calculate the pressure at point X due to the ice and the water.
pressure = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
6
4
(a) The temperature of a fixed mass of gas at constant volume is decreased.
State and explain, in terms of particles, how the pressure of the gas changes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) (i)
State the value of absolute zero in °C.
value of absolute zero = .................................................... °C [1]
(ii)
Explain what is meant by the term absolute zero. Refer to particles in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Cylinder 1 contains 350 cm3 of gas at a pressure of 9.0 × 104 Pa. The gas is transferred to
cylinder 2 and the pressure increases to 1.6 × 105 Pa. The temperature remains constant.
Calculate the volume of cylinder 2.
volume = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
7
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows an electric heater used to heat a room.
Fig. 5.1
The dimensions of the room are 4.5 m × 6.1 m × 2.4 m.
The density of air is 1.2 kg / m3.
(i)
Show that the mass of air in the room is 79 kg.
[2]
(ii)
The power of the heater is 1100 W. The specific heat capacity of air is 1000 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the time taken to increase the temperature of the air in the room from 16.0 °C
to 20.0 °C.
time = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[Turn over
8
(iii)
Suggest one reason why the time calculated in (a)(ii) is the minimum time needed to
increase the temperature of the air in the room from 16.0 °C to 20.0 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a cross-section of a double-glazed window in the room.
outer
glass
pane
narrow air gap
inner glass pane
Fig. 5.2
State the main methods of thermal energy transfer from the room to outside which are
reduced by this type of window.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
9
6
Two types of seismic waves are P-waves and S-waves.
(a) State the types of wave that P-waves and S-waves can be modelled as.
P-waves ....................................................................................................................................
S-waves ....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The velocity of a P-wave in the Earth’s solid crust is 7.2 km / s and its frequency is 4.5 Hz.
Calculate the wavelength of this P-wave.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a container of oil.
container
x
oil
Fig. 7.1
A ray of light shines on the surface of the oil. The refractive index of the oil is 1.47.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw the normal at the point where the ray enters the oil.
[1]
(b) The angle x is 56°.
Calculate the value of the angle of refraction.
angle of refraction = ......................................................... [3]
(c) State the approximate speed of light in air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
11
(d) Calculate the speed of light in the oil.
Give your answer to three significant figures.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[Turn over
12
8
(a) (i)
State what is meant by a magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Define the direction of a magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a negatively charged metal sphere.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw four lines to show the electric field and its direction.
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[2]
13
(c) Fig. 8.2 shows a circuit.
V
R3
R1
R2
Fig. 8.2
The three cells are identical and have zero resistance.
The resistors R1, R2 and R3 are identical.
The reading on the voltmeter is 6.0 V.
When the diode is conducting, it has zero resistance and zero potential difference (p.d.)
across it.
(i)
Determine the e.m.f. of one cell.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Determine the ratio of the p.d. across R2 to the p.d. across R3.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
All the cells are reversed.
1.
State and explain the change in current in R1.
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2.
Determine the new value of the ratio of the p.d. across R2 to the p.d. across R3.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
[Turn over
14
9
(a) Table 9.1 shows some properties and values for α-particles, β-particles and γ-radiation.
Complete Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
type of
radiation
number of
protons
α
2
charge / C
stopped by
+ 3.2 × 10–19
thin sheet of
paper
0
β
γ
number of
neutrons
thin sheet of
aluminium
0
[3]
(b) State how β-decay changes the nucleus of an atom.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A radiation detector used in a laboratory detects a background count rate of 30 counts / min.
A radioactive source is placed in front of the radiation detector. The initial reading on the
detector is 550 counts / min. The half-life of the source is 25 minutes.
Calculate the expected reading on the detector after 75 minutes.
reading = ...................................... counts / min [4]
(d) State two safety precautions taken when moving, using or storing radioactive sources in a
laboratory.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
15
10 (a) State the equation that defines the average orbital speed v of a planet. State the meaning of
any symbols you use.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest why countries that are a significant distance from the Equator experience significant
temperature variation throughout the year.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fill in the gaps in the paragraph about a star much more massive than the Sun.
The stage that follows the stable state in the life cycle of the star is the
....................................... stage.
It then explodes as a supernova to form a ....................................... , this leaves behind a
....................................... or a ....................................... .
[4]
(d) A galaxy is moving away from the Earth with a speed of 33 000 km / s.
The value of the Hubble constant is 2.2 × 10–18 per second.
Calculate the distance from the galaxy to the Earth. Give your answer in light-years.
distance = ....................................... light-years [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/M/J/23
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 3 8 0 2 1 7 3 2 1 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CE/FC) 315743/3
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a balloon filled with helium gas.
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the balloon is 120 kg.
(a) Calculate the weight of the balloon. Show your working.
weight = ......................................................... [1]
(b) The resultant force on the balloon is 54 N.
Show that the acceleration of the balloon is 0.45 m / s2.
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
3
(c) The balloon accelerates upwards from rest at 0.45 m / s2 for 8.0 s.
Calculate the velocity of the balloon after 8.0 s.
velocity = ......................................................... [2]
(d) Calculate the distance travelled by the balloon in the first 8.0 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
[Turn over
4
2
(a) (i)
Define pressure.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe how pressure in a liquid varies with its depth and with its density.
variation with depth
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
variation with density
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two energy resources for which the Sun is not the main source.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State and explain whether each of the following methods of electrical power generation is
renewable.
(i)
power generation in a nuclear power station
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
power generation from waves in the sea
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
5
3
(a) (i)
State which state of matter, solid, liquid or gas, has the greatest thermal expansion and
which has the least.
greatest expansion ...........................................
least expansion ................................................
(ii)
[2]
Describe, in terms of the motion and arrangement of particles, the structures of solids
and gases.
solids .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
gases .................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i)
Define specific heat capacity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
A student carries out an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of a metal. A
cylinder of the metal is heated by a 12 W electrical heater.
State the readings that the student takes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 is an incomplete ray diagram showing an object O, a converging lens and the principal
axis. The focal points of the lens are each labelled F.
F
F
O
Fig. 4.1
(i)
Complete the ray diagram to draw the image formed by the lens. Label your image I. [3]
(ii)
Circle three descriptions in the list which describe the image formed in (i).
diminished
enlarged
real
(b) (i)
inverted
upright
same size
virtual
[3]
State the name for the defect of vision that can be corrected by a converging lens.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe how a converging lens corrects the defect in (i).
You may find it helpful to sketch a ray diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
7
5
(a) Two types of electromagnetic radiation are used in glass optical fibres for high-speed
broadband.
(i)
State the type of electromagnetic radiation, other than visible light, which is used in glass
optical fibres.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Give two reasons why these two types of electromagnetic radiation are used in glass
optical fibres for high-speed broadband.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i)
The critical angle of the glass in an optical fibre is 45°.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Fig. 5.1 shows an optical fibre made of the glass described in (i).
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1, draw carefully a ray of light in the fibre undergoing total internal reflection.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
[Turn over
8
6
An electric heater uses a resistance wire of resistance 26 Ω. The power dissipated in the resistance
wire is 2500 W.
(a) Calculate the current in the resistance wire.
current = ......................................................... [3]
(b) The resistance wire of the heater has a length of 1.2 m and a cross-sectional area of
7.9 × 10–7 m2.
A new heater is designed using wire of the same material with length 1.8 m and crosssectional area 5.8 × 10–7 m2.
Calculate the resistance of this wire.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(c) The 2500 W heater is used in a country where electricity costs 0.30 dollars per kilowatt-hour.
Calculate the cost of using the heater continuously for two days.
cost = ............................................. dollars [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
9
7
The voltage across the primary coil of a 100% efficient transformer is 220 V and the voltage across
the secondary coil is 12 V.
(a) The current in the secondary coil is 2.5 A.
Calculate the current in the primary coil.
current = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the ratio of the number of turns on the primary coil to the number of turns on the
secondary coil of the transformer.
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
[Turn over
10
8
(a) During β-decay, one of the neutrons in the nucleus changes.
(i)
State what happens to this neutron.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain how charge is conserved during this change.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Complete the nuclide equation for the α-decay of radon-212 to form an isotope of polonium,
symbol Po.
212
Rn
86
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
[Turn over
12
9
Fig. 9.1 shows the Sun as the central dot and the planets Saturn, Jupiter and Earth labelled S0,
J0 and E0. The planets orbit the Sun anticlockwise. From the Earth’s orbit, the planets appear
aligned.
S0
J0
E0
Fig. 9.1 (not to scale)
Assume that Saturn takes 30 years to orbit the Sun and that Jupiter takes 12 years to orbit the
Sun.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, mark the positions of Saturn and Jupiter 5.0 years after the original positions
shown.
Label these positions S1 and J1. Show your working.
[3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
13
(b) (i)
On Fig. 9.1, mark the positions of Saturn and Jupiter 20 years after the original positions
shown in Fig. 9.1.
Label these positions S2 and J2.
[1]
(ii)
State what is observed from the Earth’s orbit after 20 years.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) (i)
Choose two words from the list to describe each planet.
gaseous
large
rocky
small
Jupiter ...............................................................................................................................
Earth ..................................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii)
The average density of Jupiter is much less than that of the Earth.
The gravitational field strength at the surface of Jupiter is greater than that at the surface
of the Earth.
Explain how these differences in density and in gravitational field strength are consistent
with your answers to (c)(i).
density
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
gravitational field strength
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
[Turn over
14
(d) The average density of Jupiter is 1300 kg / m3 and its volume is 1.4 × 1015 km3.
Calculate the mass of Jupiter.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
15
10 (a) Show that 1 light-year = 9.5 × 1015 m.
[4]
(b) (i)
State one measurement that is taken when determining the speed v at which a galaxy is
moving away from the Earth.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Write down an equation relating v and the distance d of a far galaxy.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
State how the distance d of a far galaxy can be determined other than by using the
equation in (ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/M/J/23
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 9 5 5 6 3 8 7 5 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2024
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (PB/CT) 330659/2
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
2
1
A long tube contains oil. A small ball is held at rest at the surface of the oil. At time t = 0, the ball is
released and begins to fall vertically through the oil.
Fig. 1.1 shows the ball falling through the oil.
oil
ball
Fig. 1.1
As the ball begins to fall through the oil, it accelerates.
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The mass of the ball is 0.0075 kg.
Calculate the resultant force acting on the ball when it is accelerating downwards at 2.8 m / s2 .
resultant force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
3
(c) As the ball falls, its speed v is recorded. Fig. 1.2 is the speed–time graph for the falling ball.
0.06
v
m/s
0.04
0.02
0
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
t/s
0.04
Fig. 1.2
(i)
Describe what happens to the acceleration between t = 0 and t = 0.040 s.
Explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(ii)
By drawing a tangent on Fig. 1.2, determine a value for the acceleration of the ball
at t = 0.010 s.
acceleration = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows two identical trolleys, P and Q, held at rest on a frictionless horizontal surface.
A load is fixed to trolley P.
compressed spring
1.5 kg load
trolley P
trolley Q
Fig. 2.1
There is a compressed spring between trolley P and trolley Q.
The trolleys are released. As the spring expands, it pushes the trolleys apart.
Trolley Q moves to the right at a constant speed of 0.36 m / s.
The mass of each trolley is 1.2 kg. The mass of the load on trolley P is 1.5 kg.
The spring has negligible mass.
(a) Calculate:
(i)
the speed at which trolley P moves to the left
speed of P = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
the kinetic energy of trolley Q when it moves at 0.36 m / s.
kinetic energy of Q = ......................................................... [3]
(b) State the energy transfer that takes place as the spring expands.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
5
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a small block of ice floating in a beaker of warm water.
block of ice
warm water
Fig. 3.1
(a) State one way in which the motion of the particles in ice differs from the motion of the particles
in water.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Energy is transferred from the water to the block of ice.
(i)
State the name of the thermal process that transfers energy from the water to the ice.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Initially, there is 0.34 kg of water in the beaker. The specific heat capacity of water
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the energy transferred from this water as its temperature decreases from
28 °C to 10 °C.
energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
The temperature of the water near the ice decreases first.
Explain how convection causes the temperature of all the water in the beaker to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
7
(iv)
State what happens to the internal energy of the water as the temperature of the
water decreases.
Describe the change in terms of the energy of the particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
[Turn over
8
4
The lens in a magnifying glass is a converging lens.
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows the lens of the magnifying glass, its two focal points, F1 and F2 , and its
principal axis.
lens
principal axis
F1
F2
Fig. 4.1
(i)
State what is meant by ‘focal point’.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
A student using the magnifying glass sees a magnified image of an object.
On Fig. 4.1, mark:
•
•
(iii)
a point X on the principal axis for a possible position of the object
a point E for a possible position of the student’s eye.
[1]
Underline two words in the list that describe the image produced in (a)(ii).
inverted
real
upright
virtual
[1]
(b) The refractive index of the glass used to make the lens is 1.5.
(i)
The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the speed of light in the glass.
speed in glass = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
9
(ii)
State what happens to the wavelength of light as it passes into the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Converging lenses are used in spectacles (glasses) to correct one problem with vision.
State the name of the problem and explain how a converging lens is used to correct it.
You may draw a diagram.
name of problem: ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
[Turn over
10
5
(a) Describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 represents a seismic wave produced by an earthquake.
K
J
Fig. 5.1
(i)
State whether this seismic wave is a P-wave (primary) or an S-wave (secondary).
Justify your choice.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The wave represented in Fig. 5.1 has a wavelength of 1.2 × 104 m.
Calculate the actual distance between point J and point K.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
The wave in (ii) travels through the ground at a speed of 4600 m / s.
As the wave passes a certain point, the ground completes 5 oscillations.
Calculate the time that it takes for the wave to pass. Show your working.
time = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
11
6
Fig. 6.1 shows an isolated metal sphere suspended by an insulating thread from the ceiling.
insulating thread
metal sphere
Fig. 6.1
The sphere is negatively charged.
(a) The charge on the sphere produces an electric field in the surroundings.
(i)
State what is meant by ‘electric field’.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Draw on Fig. 6.1 to show the pattern and direction of the electric field produced by the
charge on the sphere. Draw at least four lines.
[3]
(b) The magnitude of the charge on the sphere is 3.5 × 10–10 C.
An earthed metal wire is touched against the surface of the sphere and the sphere
is discharged.
(i)
State what happens in the wire as the sphere is discharged.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
It takes a time of 0.14 ns for the sphere to discharge completely.
Calculate the average current in the earthed wire as the sphere discharges.
average current = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
[Total: 9]
[Turn over
12
7
The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery is 7.5 V.
(a) Define the term electromotive force.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The battery is connected in series with a variable resistor and a 30 Ω resistor. The battery is
made using 1.5 V cells.
(i)
Draw a circuit diagram that shows all the 1.5 V cells connected to produce an e.m.f.
of 7.5 V, the variable resistor and the 30 Ω resistor.
[3]
(ii)
The resistance of the variable resistor can be varied from 0 Ω to a maximum resistance
of 150 Ω.
Using the axes in Fig. 7.1, draw a graph to show how the current in the circuit varies with
the resistance of the variable resistor as it increases from 0 Ω to 150 Ω.
Determine and label the value of the maximum current on the y-axis.
current / A
0
0
75
150
resistance of variable resistor / Ω
Fig. 7.1
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
13
8
The isotope thallium-208 ( 208
81Tl ) is radioactive. It decays by β-decay.
(a) Thallium-208 decays to an isotope of lead (Pb).
(i)
Complete the equation for this decay.
208
81Tl
(ii)
........
........
Pb
+
........
........β
[3]
The β-emission of thallium-208 is accompanied by γ-emission from the nucleus.
Explain why this γ-emission does not affect the numbers in the equation in (a)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Suggest one reason why a nucleus of thallium-208 is unstable.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A sample of thallium-208 is placed in a thick lead container. Fig. 8.1 shows a narrow beam of
β-particles and γ-radiation emerging from a small hole in one side of the container.
magnetic field
into page
sample of
thallium-208
beam of
β-particles and
γ-radiation
Fig. 8.1
The narrow beam enters a region where there is a magnetic field that is directed into the page.
On Fig. 8.1:
•
•
draw a line labelled β to indicate the path of the β-particles in the magnetic field
draw a line labelled γ to indicate the path of the γ-radiation in the magnetic field.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
[Turn over
14
9
The Sun is one of many billions of stars in the Milky Way. The Sun emits a very large quantity of
energy as electromagnetic radiation.
(a) State the three regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in which the Sun emits the
most energy.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation from the Sun travels at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s. The radiation
takes 500 s to reach the Earth.
Calculate the distance from the Sun to the Earth.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Approximately 4.6 billion years ago, the Sun formed from an interstellar cloud of gas and
became a stable star.
(i)
Describe and explain what happens as an interstellar cloud of gas forms a protostar.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Describe and explain what happens as a protostar becomes a stable star.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
0625/41/M/J/24
* 0019655392601 *
,
,
Cambridge IGCSE™
¬WŠ. 3mGu[‘5žREW
¬55d>žEY yV^kKJy‚
¥ee•u•E•55eU5ee5eU
* 7 5 6 7 0 9 4 0 0 0 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
May/June 2024
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (PB/SG) 330660/2
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
1
,
A load is suspended from a thread. The vertical force on the thread due to the load is 0.75 N.
(a) Calculate the mass of the load.
mass = .......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the load suspended from the thread.
thread
X
load
Fig. 1.1
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
2
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392602 *
The tension in the horizontal wire is 1.2 N.
By drawing a scale diagram or by calculation, determine:
•
•
the magnitude of the resultant of the force at X due to the load and due to the tension in
the wire
the direction of the resultant relative to the vertical direction.
magnitude of resultant force = ............................................................. N
direction of resultant relative to vertical = .............................................................. °
[4]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÓďÇĎ×
Ĭµ·ã¿ĪÁħâüÿ¹ĖÑûòñĂ
ĥõµĕµõąõąõõĕµĥÅõąÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Show your working.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
A wire is attached to the load at point X and pulled horizontally to the right.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392603 *
3
,
,
(c) Forces may produce changes in the size and the shape of an object.
State two other changes that forces may produce.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÓčÇĎ×
Ĭµ¸äÇĠ½ė×þòðÂéßòāĂ
ĥõÅÕõĕĥĕĕąåĕµąåµĕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
4
2
,
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A train has a total mass of 520 000 kg. The train accelerates at 1.1 m / s2.
(i)
Calculate the time taken for the train to increase its speed from 15 m / s to 28 m / s.
time = ......................................................... [2]
Calculate the force required to produce an acceleration of 1.1 m / s2 for this train.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392604 *
The train uses electric motors.
Explain why the force on the train due to the motors is greater than the value calculated
in (ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÑďÇĐ×
Ĭµ¸áÇĦ¯ĒäĄù÷ĤąýĢùĂ
ĥÅĕÕµĕĥµõåÕĕõąąµąÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(iii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
force = ......................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392605 *
5
,
3
,
A student drops a heavy ball from a vertical height of 1.8 m above the ground. The ball then falls to
the ground. It does not bounce after hitting the ground.
(a) Describe the transfers of energy of the ball between stores from when the ball begins to fall to
when it reaches the ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Calculate the maximum speed of the ball. Ignore air resistance.
Show your working.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
maximum speed = .......................................................... [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÑčÇĐ×
Ĭµ·â¿Ĥ³ĢÕöĈ²¸íÙĢĉĂ
ĥÅĥĕõõąÕĥÕąĕõĥĥõĕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
(a) State two ways that evaporation differs from boiling.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows part of a container used to store a mixture of liquid and gaseous oxygen.
steel walls of
container
vacuum
Fig. 4.1
The temperature of the liquid oxygen is –160 °C.
(i)
Determine the temperature of the liquid oxygen in K.
temperature = ....................................................... K [1]
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
The container is made of steel and there is a vacuum between the inner and outer walls.
The outer wall of the container is at room temperature.
State two methods of thermal energy transfer that a vacuum prevents.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
4
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
6
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392606 *
2 .........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÔčÆĎ×
Ĭµ¸âÄĪÛĬÍñõËØą¼ÊùĂ
ĥĕÅĕõÕąõåµåĕµĥŵÅÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
1 .........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392607 *
7
,
,
(c) Describe, in terms of particles, how a gas exerts a pressure on the walls of its container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÔďÆĎ×
Ĭµ·áÌĠ×ĜìćČþĄíĠÊĉĂ
ĥĕµÕµµĥĕµÅõĕµąåõÕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÒčÆĐ×
Ĭµ·äÌĦåčÏĉăąâѾÚñĂ
ĥåĥÕõµĥµÕĥąĕõąąõÅÕ
8
BLANK PAGE
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392608 *
9
,
5
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
Fig. 5.1 shows a ray of yellow light incident on a glass prism ABC.
yellow
light
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392609 *
B
A
C
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain why the ray does not change direction when it enters the prism at face AB.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The critical angle for the glass is 42°.
(i)
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Show your working.
refractive index = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, continue the path of the light through the prism and after it leaves the prism.
[3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(c) Internet data can be transferred using infrared waves in optical fibres.
State two advantages of using optical fibres to transmit data.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÒďÆĐ×
Ĭµ¸ãÄĤéĝêïîÄöéĚÚāĂ
ĥåĕĕµÕąÕÅĕÕĕõĥĥµÕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Total: 8]
[Turn over
10
6
,
(a) A sound wave travels through air. Fig. 6.1 shows a pressure–time graph for the air at
one place.
pressure
atmospheric
pressure
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
time
Fig. 6.1
(i)
On Fig. 6.1:
•
•
label one point C to indicate a compression
label one point R to indicate a rarefaction.
[2]
(ii)
Explain why this graph cannot be used to find the wavelength of the sound wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
… .................................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii)
The sound becomes louder and of lower pitch.
State what happens to:
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392610 *
the frequency of the sound.
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÓčÈĎ×
Ĭµ¶äÁĨÝċÑĂČß¾ÓêĢĉĂ
ĥõąĕõµÅµõÕąÕõåąõõÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
the amplitude of the sound
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392711 *
11
,
,
(b) A sound of frequency 13 kHz is transmitted through water.
The speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound in water.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
(c) State the approximate speed of sound in air.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
speed = ......................................................... [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÔčÈĎ×
Ĭµ¶â¾īÎĝâăøĜõēêÒñĂ
ĥÅåÕõĕĥÕĕÕåÕµĥąµÅÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392712 *
12
,
7
,
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows three bars of steel, A, B and C.
A
B
Fig. 7.1
A student is given the three pieces of steel. Two of the pieces are magnetised and one piece
is unmagnetised.
Describe and explain how the student determines which piece is unmagnetised using only
the three pieces of steel.
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
C
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
output
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÒďÈĐ×
Ĭµ¶ã¾ġàĬÕýïēׯČÂĉĂ
ĥõõÕµĕĥõõõÕÕõĥåµÕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a circuit diagram of a step‑down transformer.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
13
,
(i)
,
The mains voltage supplied to the transformer is 240 V. The output power of the
transformer is 45 W. The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
input current = .......................................................... [3]
(ii)
Draw a labelled diagram of a step‑down transformer. On the labels, state a suitable
material for each of the components.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392713 *
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÒčÈĐ×
ĬµµäÆħäĜäûĂÖăÇÐÂùĂ
ĥõąĕõõąĕĥąąÕõąÅõÅÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
14
,
,
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit. The circuit is designed to switch on a night light when the surroundings
are dark.
(i)
On Fig. 8.1, draw the circuit symbol for a voltmeter used to measure the potential
difference (p.d.) across the light‑dependent resistor (LDR).
[1]
(ii)
The surroundings change from light to dark.
1. State the effect of this change on the resistance of the LDR.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
2. State and explain the effect of this change on the p.d. across the light‑emitting diode
(LED).
......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Fig. 8.1
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
8
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392714 *
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÑĎÅĒ×
Ĭµ¶âÇĩÏĤÒíąùßĎÜòñĂ
ĥÕąÕµĕŵąĕąĕµÅĥµĕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
................................................................................................................................ [2]
15
,
,
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows another circuit. Lamps A and B are identical filament lamps.
240 V
A
B
Fig. 8.2
The current supplied by the power supply is 0.50 A.
Calculate the resistance of lamp A.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392715 *
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×ĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÑĐÅĒ×
Ĭµµá¿ğÓĔçċü°ûĦĀòāĂ
ĥÕõĕõõåÕĕĥÕĕµåąõąÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
© UCLES 2024
16
BLANK PAGE
ĬÕĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÓĎÅĔ×
Ĭµµä¿ĥáĕÔąó·ÙÊÞĢùĂ
ĥĥåĕµõåõõÅåĕõååõĕÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392716 *
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392717 *
17
,
9
,
(a) Radioactive isotopes that emit ionising radiation are used in hospitals.
(i)
State and explain two safety precautions necessary for the use of these isotopes in
medical procedures.
safety procedure 1 ............................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
safety procedure 2 ............................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Give two reasons why alpha‑emitters are not used as radioactive tracers inside the body.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Sodium‑24 is an isotope of sodium (Na) that has a proton number of 11 and a nucleon number
of 24.
Sodium‑24 decays by emission of a beta‑particle to form an isotope of magnesium (Mg).
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Use nuclide notation to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×ĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÓĐÅĔ×
Ĭµ¶ãÇģÝĥåóþòý²úĢĉĂ
ĥĥÕÕõĕÅĕĥµõĕõÅŵąÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
[Turn over
18
,
,
10 (a) The Solar System includes the Sun and planets.
State two other types of natural object that orbit the Sun.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392718 *
(c) Fig. 10.1 shows the orbit of an object around the Sun. At point A, the object is closest to the
Sun. At point B, the object is furthest away from the Sun.
A
B
Sun
Fig. 10.1
State and explain the energy transfer as the object travels from point A to point B.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) State the shape of the orbits of the planets.
(d) Jupiter is 7.8 × 1011 m from the Sun. The speed of light in a vacuum is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the time taken for light from the Sun to reach Jupiter.
time = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÒĎÇĒ×
Ĭµ¸äÆħéăÎþüčµÌÊÚāĂ
ĥµÅÕµõąõÕõåÕõąåõåÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
explanation ................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392719 *
19
,
11
,
(a) Name the galaxy that contains the Sun.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Light observed from distant galaxies is redshifted.
State the theory of the Universe that this observation supports.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Cosmic microwave background radiation (CMBR) is observed at all points in space.
(i)
State when this radiation was produced.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why this radiation is now in the microwave region of the electromagnetic spectrum.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×ĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÒĐÇĒ×
Ĭµ·ã¾ġåóëüąÜġ´ĎÚñĂ
ĥµµĕõĕĥĕÅąõÕõĥŵµÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
20
,
,
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĉ¯Ġ³íÇõÛđµĞÔĎÇĔ×
Ĭµ·â¾ī×öÐöþÓÃĐ°ÊĉĂ
ĥąĥĕµĕĥµååąÕµĥĥµåÕ
0625/42/M/J/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
BLANK PAGE
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0019655392720 *
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 0 3 3 3 5 3 2 8 9 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
May/June 2024
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages.
DC (PB/SG) 330661/2
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
2
1
A ball of mass 130 g is launched from the ground at an initial velocity of 14 m / s vertically upwards.
It decelerates until it is at rest momentarily at a height h above the ground.
(a) Define deceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The acceleration of free fall is 9.8 m / s2.
Show that the time taken for the ball to reach height h is 1.4 s. Ignore the effect of air resistance.
[1]
(c) Calculate h. Ignore the effect of air resistance.
h = ......................................................... [3]
(d) The ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.
Describe and explain the motion of the ball as it falls. Consider the effect of air resistance in
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows solar-powered traffic warning lights.
solar cell
lights
Fig. 2.1
The energy from the solar cell is stored in a battery.
(a) Name the energy store in the battery.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The two lights in Fig. 2.1 are connected in parallel.
State one advantage of a parallel connection in a lighting circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The efficiency of the solar cell is 22%. The power supplied to the lights by the cell is 15 W.
(i)
State what is meant by 22% efficiency.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the solar power input to the solar cell.
power = ......................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest two advantages of using a solar cell to power the traffic warning lights in Fig. 2.1
compared to using mains electricity.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows two children balanced on a seesaw. A seesaw is a length of wood which rotates
about a central pivot.
child A
450 N
child B
1.60 m
0.80 m
900 N
pivot (fulcrum)
Fig. 3.1
(a) Child B moves 0.050 m further away from the pivot.
(i)
Explain why the seesaw rotates clockwise.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Child A puts on a backpack and the seesaw now balances.
Calculate the mass of the backpack.
mass = .................................................... kg [3]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
5
(b) The concrete floor under the seesaw is replaced with a rubber floor. A child falls from the
seesaw and experiences an impulse when they hit the floor.
(i)
Define impulse.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain how the rubber floor reduces injury to the child.
Use ideas about impulse, force, momentum and time in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a stainless-steel saucepan being heated on an electric cooker. The saucepan
contains water.
Fig. 4.1
(a) State what happens to the water particles as the water temperature increases.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The saucepan contains 250 cm3 of water. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i)
Show that the mass of the water in the saucepan is 0.25 kg.
[2]
(ii)
Calculate the energy required to increase the water temperature from 20 °C to 65 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
7
(iii)
The heater supplies enough power to heat the water in 39 s.
A student measures the time taken to heat the water as 115 s.
Suggest why the actual time taken to heat the water is longer. Assume that the student
takes accurate measurements.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The stainless-steel saucepan is replaced with an aluminium saucepan of the same mass.
It contains the same volume of water.
The specific heat capacity of stainless steel is 500 J / (kg °C).
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 890 J / (kg °C).
Explain how using an aluminium saucepan will affect the time taken to heat the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows two containers, each filled with hot water.
metal
non-metal
water
water
Fig. 5.1
The outer surface of the metal container is hot.
(a) Explain how electrons transfer thermal energy through the metal of the container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The outer surface of the non-metal container is much cooler than the outer surface of the
metal container.
Explain why a non-metal conducts thermal energy less well than a metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Explain, in terms of particles, why gases are poor thermal conductors compared to
non-metal solids.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a thin converging lens used to produce a magnified image of an object AB.
B
F1 A
F2
principal axis
Fig. 6.1
(a) Explain the meaning of the terms principal focus and focal length.
principal focus ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
focal length ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw the magnified image of AB. Show your working.
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows two charged metal plates. X marks the position of the centre of the space between
the plates.
positively charged
plate
+ + + + + + + + +
X
– – – – – – – – –
negatively charged
plate
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
(ii)
On Fig. 7.1, draw at least four field lines to show the pattern and the direction of the
electric field between the two charged plates.
[2]
Describe the effect on a negatively charged particle placed at X.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) During a thunderstorm, an electric field is set up between a cloud and the ground. Charges on
the cloud and on the ground are shown in Fig. 7.2.
cloud
_
_
_
_
_
path of
lightning
ground
+
+
+
+ +
+
Fig. 7.2
The lightning shown in Fig. 7.2 discharges a current of 28 000 A for 0.0012 s.
(i)
Calculate the charge that flows from the cloud to the ground.
charge = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
11
(ii)
The lightning transfers 1.2 × 108 J of energy.
Calculate the potential difference between the base of the cloud and the ground.
potential difference = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows images produced during two different medical scanning procedures.
ultrasound scan of a fetus
X-ray scan of a hand
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i)
Define ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State how the speed of sound in liquid compares to the speed of sound in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
X-rays are part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
State the speed of X-rays in a vacuum.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe three similarities or differences between the use of ultrasound and X-rays in medical
scanning procedures.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
13
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a mobile phone (cell phone) being charged on a wireless charging plate.
primary coil in
charging plate
secondary coil in
mobile phone
Fig. 9.1
(a) When the charging plate is switched on, there is an alternating current (a.c.) in the primary coil.
A secondary coil is in the mobile phone.
Explain how a current is produced in the secondary coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The maximum energy stored in the battery of the mobile phone is 0.012 kW h.
(i)
Show that this maximum energy is 4.3 × 104 J.
[1]
(ii)
The charging plate in Fig. 9.1 has a useful output power of 15 W.
The phone manufacturer claims that the battery can be charged to 50% capacity in less
than 30 minutes.
Show that this claim is true.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
14
10 Leaks in underground water pipes are detected using radioactive tracers. Fig. 10.1 shows a
radiation detector above a water pipe.
382
counter
detector
pipe
leak
ground
Fig. 10.1
(a) Before the radioactive tracer is added to the water, the detector measures the background
radiation above the pipe. The average background radiation is 26 counts / minute.
(i)
Define background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Suggest one source of radiation that may make a significant contribution to the
background count rate.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
A radioactive tracer is added to the water. The counter in Fig. 10.1 shows the count rate
in counts / minute above the leak in the water pipe.
Determine the count rate due to the tracer.
count rate = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
15
(b) Suggest which radioactive emission, alpha, beta or gamma, is suitable for detecting the leak
in the water pipe.
Explain your answer.
emission ...................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) (i)
Explain why the radioactive isotope must not have a very short half-life.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why the radioactive isotope must not have a very long half-life.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
[Turn over
16
11
A galaxy is approximately 1.2 × 1026 m from the Earth.
(a) Scientists observe light from the distant galaxy.
The wavelength of the observed light is longer than the wavelength of the light emitted from
the galaxy.
State the name of this effect.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i)
State the current estimate for the Hubble constant H0.
H0 = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the speed at which the galaxy is moving away from the Earth.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Scientists have measured the speeds at which distant galaxies are moving away from
the Earth and their distances from the Earth.
These measurements suggest that all the Universe was once at a single point.
Explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
0625/43/M/J/24
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 0 8 1 8 7 0 4 3 7 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CGW) 196148/2
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows an ice-hockey player moving on ice. He is preparing to hit the solid disc called a
puck.
ice-hockey player
ice
hockey stick
disc
Fig. 1.1
The disc of mass 0.16 kg is moving horizontally across the surface of the ice at a speed of 15 m / s.
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the momentum of the disc.
magnitude of momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The hockey player strikes the disc with his hockey stick and the momentum of the disc
changes. The disc gains momentum of 3.0 kg m / s at 45° to the original direction of travel of
the disc, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
direction of
momentum gained
disc
45°
original direction of travel
Fig. 1.2 (view from above)
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
3
(i)
State the magnitude of the impulse exerted on the disc and the direction, in degrees, of
the impulse relative to the original direction of travel.
magnitude of impulse = ...............................................................
direction of impulse:
(ii)
............................ ° to original direction
[1]
Determine the magnitude of the new momentum of the disc and its new direction relative
to the original direction of travel by drawing a scale diagram.
magnitude of new momentum = ...............................................................
direction of new momentum:
........................... ° to original direction
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
4
2
A vertical tube contains a liquid. A metal ball is held at rest by a thread just below the surface of
the liquid, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
thread
metal ball
tube
liquid
Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)
The diameter of the tube is much greater than the diameter of the ball. The ball is released and it
accelerates downwards uniformly for a short period of time.
(a) Describe what happens to the velocity of the ball in the short period of time as it accelerates
downwards uniformly.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The ball reaches terminal velocity.
Describe and explain the motion of the ball from when it is released until it reaches terminal
velocity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
5
(c) The metal ball has a mass of 2.1 g. It falls a distance of 0.80 m between being released and
reaching the bottom of the tube.
(i)
Calculate the gravitational potential energy transferred from the ball as it falls.
gravitational potential energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
When the ball reaches the bottom of the tube, it has a speed of 1.2 m / s. Calculate the
kinetic energy of the ball at the bottom of the tube.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
(iii)
Explain why the value calculated in (c)(i) is different from that calculated in (c)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
6
3
A U-shaped tube of constant cross-sectional area contains water of density 1000 kg / m3. Both
sides of the U-tube are open to the atmosphere.
Fig. 3.1 shows that the water levels in the two sides of the tube are equal.
rubber tubing
connected to gas
supply
stopper
0.200 m
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
The atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa.
The left-hand side of the tube is now connected to a gas supply using a length of rubber tubing.
This causes the level of the water in the left-hand side of the tube to drop by 0.200 m, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
(a) Calculate the pressure of the gas supply. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
7
(b) Fig. 3.3 shows that the gas supply is now connected to a cylinder that contains a piston.
cylinder
open to the
atmosphere
rubber tubing
connected to
gas supply
piston
Fig. 3.3
The pressure of the gas moves the piston to the right.
(i)
The area of the piston in contact with the gas is 0.025 m2.
Calculate the resultant force on the piston.
resultant force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The pressure of the gas causes the piston to move a distance of 0.50 m to the right.
Calculate the work done by the gas from the supply on the piston.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
8
4
A large test-tube contains a liquid at room temperature. An electric heater is immersed in the liquid
and is switched on. Thermal energy is supplied to the liquid by the heater. The temperature of the
liquid increases until it reaches its boiling point. The liquid then starts to change into gas.
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules and their motion, how a liquid differs from a gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Describe what happens to molecules of the liquid as its temperature begins to increase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) (i)
Explain, in terms of molecules, why a supply of thermal energy is needed to change the
liquid into a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The density of the liquid in the test-tube is 0.86 g / cm3. The volume of liquid in the testtube is 50 cm3.
The liquid reaches its boiling point. It now absorbs 18 000 J of thermal energy and all of
the liquid changes into a gas.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of this liquid.
specific latent heat = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
9
5
A metal container is used to cook food. The metal container has thick walls. Hot cooking oil at a
temperature of 120 °C is poured into the container.
(a) The outside surface of the container gets hot. Some thermal energy passes through the metal
because vibrating atoms in the metal collide with neighbouring atoms and transfer energy to
them.
Explain how the rest of the thermal energy is conducted through the metal container to the
outside surface by another process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The outside surface of the container is brightly polished and shiny.
Explain how this reduces the power that needs to be supplied to keep the oil at the correct
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The metal container is spherical. The spherical container has a smaller surface area than a
long, thin container of the same volume.
Explain the advantage of using a spherical container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a shallow tank viewed from above. The depth of the water is different in the two
parts of the tank. Fig. 6.1 shows the crests and the troughs of a wave that pass from left to right.
boundary
45°
Key
trough
crest
33°
2.6 cm
Fig. 6.1 (not to scale)
As the wave passes from one side to the other, the direction of the wavefronts changes.
(a) Explain why the direction of the wavefronts changes in the way shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The speed of the wave in the left-hand part of the tank is 0.39 m / s.
(i)
Using information from Fig. 6.1, determine the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
11
(ii)
Determine the speed of the wave in the right-hand side of the tank.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
12
7
(a) A permanent magnet is made from only one material.
Underline the material from which it is possible to make a permanent magnet.
aluminium
copper
soft iron
mercury
plastic
steel
[1]
uranium
(b) An electron source produces a narrow beam of electrons that all travel at the same speed.
The electron source is placed in a vacuum and the beam of electrons travels vertically
downwards. Fig. 7.1 shows the beam of electrons before it passes between the N-pole and
the S-pole of a magnet.
electron source
beam of electrons
N-pole
S-pole
Fig. 7.1
(i)
Describe what is meant by the direction of a magnetic field. State the direction of the
magnetic field between the two poles in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
13
(ii)
Describe and explain what happens to the beam of electrons in the magnetic field
between the poles of the magnet in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) A beam consists of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays.
Explain how a uniform magnetic field may be used to separate the α-particles, the β-particles
and the γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
14
8
(a) Explain what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An electric heater contains two heating elements R1 and R2. An electric motor operates a fan.
The fan blows cool air over the heating elements.
Fig. 8.1 shows the circuit.
S1
240 V mains
supply
S2
S3
R1
R2
M
Fig. 8.1
The heater is powered by a mains supply of e.m.f. 240 V.
Switches S1 and S2 are closed. Heating element R1 gets hot. The resistance of R1 is 30 Ω.
(i)
Calculate the current in heating element R1.
current = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the power produced in heating element R1.
power = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
The resistance of heating element R2 is 60 Ω.
Switches S1, S2 and S3 are closed.
1.
State and explain how the current in R2 compares with the current in R1.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
15
2. The current in the motor is 0.10 A. The cable from the electric heater to the plug for
the mains socket is safe when the current in it is less than 20 A.
Suggest and explain a suitable fuse rating for this circuit.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
[Turn over
16
9
(a) (i)
Describe what is observed during total internal reflection.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State two conditions required for light to be totally internally reflected.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Describe and explain the action of optical fibres in communication technology. You may draw
a diagram in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
17
10 A radiation detector is placed on the bench in a laboratory. It detects a background count rate of
40 counts / minute.
(a) State what is meant by background radiation. Suggest one source for it.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A sample containing atoms of the radioactive isotope polonium-208 is removed from a
lead container and brought close to the detector. The average count rate increases to
890 counts / minute.
When two sheets of paper are inserted between the sample and the detector, the average
count rate returns to 40 counts / minute.
Polonium-208 is represented by the symbol 208
84Po. It decays to an isotope of lead (Pb).
(i)
Deduce the type of radiation emitted by polonium-208. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of polonium-208.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/41/O/N/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 8 0 7 6 7 8 9 1 0 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CGW) 196149/3
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
A sky-diver jumps out of a hot-air balloon, which is 4000 m above the ground. At time = 30 s, she
opens her parachute.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of her fall.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0
4.0
10
20
30
40
50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)
Label with the letter X the point on the graph where the sky-diver opens her parachute.
[1]
(ii)
Label with the letters Y and Z the two parts of the graph where the sky-diver falls at
terminal velocity.
[1]
(b) Describe, in terms of the forces acting on the sky-diver, her motion between leaving the
balloon and opening her parachute.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Calculate the average speed of the sky-diver in the first 4.0 s of her fall.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
3
2
(a) Define the moment of a force about a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform rod of wood suspended from a pivot.
0.25 m
pivot
34°
centre of mass
0.75 m
rod of wood
W
F
Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)
The rod is held stationary by a horizontal force F acting as shown.
The mass of the rod is 0.080 kg.
Calculate:
(i)
the weight W of the rod
weight = .......................................................... [1]
(ii)
the moment of W about the pivot
moment = .......................................................... [2]
(iii)
the moment of F about the pivot
moment = .......................................................... [1]
(iv)
the force F.
force = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
4
(c) The angle between the rod and the vertical is increased.
State whether the force F needed to hold the rod stationary must be increased, decreased or
stay the same.
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
5
3
The kinetic energy of air passing through a wind turbine every minute is 720 000 J. The electrical
output of the turbine is 9.0 A at a potential difference (p.d.) of 240 V.
Calculate the efficiency (%) of the wind turbine.
efficiency = ...................................................... % [5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer.
V
wire of
material A
ice
cubes
wire of
material A
wire of
material B
water at 0 °C
water at 100 °C
Fig. 4.1
The voltmeter reading is 5.4 mV.
(a) State the name of this type of thermometer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the same thermometer used to measure the temperature of liquid X.
V
liquid X
water at 20 °C
Fig. 4.2
With the setup in Fig. 4.2, the voltmeter reading is 1.7 mV.
Calculate the temperature of liquid X measured by the thermometer.
temperature = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
7
(c) Suggest an application for which this type of thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-inglass thermometer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
8
5
(a) (i)
Define specific latent heat.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain the melting of a solid in terms of molecules and energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An electrical heater is used to heat a liquid to its boiling point. Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus.
connecting
wires
liquid
heater element
balance
container
3800 g
Fig. 5.1
When the liquid is boiling, the heater supplies 1.26 MJ of thermal energy. The mass reading
shown on the balance decreases from 3800 g to 2300 g.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of the liquid.
specific latent heat = ......................................................... [3]
(c) State and explain a precaution to improve the accuracy of the value of specific latent heat
calculated in (b).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Total: 9]
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a transverse wave produced in a string.
string
Fig. 6.1 (full size)
(a) On Fig. 6.1:
(i)
draw labelled lines to show
1. the amplitude of the wave
2. the wavelength of the wave
(ii)
[2]
label a trough with the letter T.
[1]
(b) A person vibrates one end of the string vertically to produce the wave. He makes 15 complete
oscillations in 60 s.
Show that the speed of the wave is 2.0 cm / s.
[3]
(c) State the difference between transverse waves and longitudinal waves. Use your ideas about
the direction of oscillations.
transverse waves ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
longitudinal waves ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light passing through an optical fibre.
P
i
Q
Fig. 7.1
The optical fibre is made of glass that has a refractive index of 1.4.
(a) (i)
No light refracts from the fibre at points P and Q.
State the name of the process that occurs at P and Q.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the minimum value of angle i for there to be no refraction at point P.
angle = .......................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain the use of optical fibres in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The ray of light shown in Fig. 7.1 is monochromatic light from a laser.
State what is meant by monochromatic light. Use one of the following quantities in your answer.
amplitude
brightness
frequency
refractive index
speed
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
11
8
(a) State and explain why electrical sockets and plugs used outside in a garden need to be
different from those that can be used safely in a room inside a house.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State and explain why fuses and circuit breakers are installed in electrical circuits connected
to the mains supply.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a bar magnet and four plotting compasses A, B, C and D.
D
C
A
bar magnet
B
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1:
(i)
draw an arrow on each of the three plotting compasses B, C and D to show the direction
of the magnetic field
[2]
(ii)
label the magnetic poles of the bar magnet N and S.
[1]
(b) Describe one method for demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
13
(c) Fig. 9.2 represents a current in a wire. The current is into the plane of the paper.
(i)
Draw the pattern of the magnetic field produced around the wire. Show clearly the
direction of the magnetic field.
Fig. 9.2
(ii)
[2]
The direction of the current in the wire is reversed. The magnitude of the current is
unchanged.
State the effect that reversing the current has on the magnetic field produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete electrical circuit.
2.0 Ω
A
C
D
6.0 Ω
B
4.0 Ω
E
F
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)
A student completes the circuit and measures the current in the 6.0 Ω resistor.
On Fig. 10.1, draw an ammeter symbol in one gap and straight lines to indicate wires in
the other gaps to show how the student should do this.
[1]
(ii)
A voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω
resistor.
On Fig. 10.1, draw a voltmeter symbol connected in the correct position.
(iii)
[2]
With the circuit completed, the current in the 2.0 Ω resistor is 2.5 A.
Calculate the current in the 6.0 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same electrical circuit with an alternating current (a.c.) power supply and
a wire in the gap AB.
2.0 Ω
A
C
D
6.0 Ω
B
4.0 Ω
E
F
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw a diode symbol in one gap and a straight line to indicate a wire in the other
gap so that there is a current from right to left in the 4.0 Ω resistor and an alternating current
in the 2.0 Ω resistor.
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
[Turn over
16
11
(a) State two differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Radioactive tracers emitting γ-rays can be used in medicine. The half-life of the source of
these γ-rays is 6 hours.
(i)
Explain why a source of γ-rays used in this way should not have a half-life shorter or
longer than about 6 hours.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Technetium-99 is a source of γ-rays often used as a radioactive tracer. It is produced
from molybdenum-99 which emits β-particles. The symbol for technetium is Tc and the
symbol for molybdenum is Mo.
Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
99 Mo
42
(iii)
.....
.....
Tc
+
.....
..... β
[3]
Technetium-99 is a radioactive nuclide.
State another use of radioactive nuclides in medicine.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/42/O/N/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 1 7 2 8 4 2 2 4 9 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2020
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CGW) 196162/3
© UCLES 2020
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a trolley travelling down a ramp.
tape
trolley
ramp
P
x
Fig. 1.1
The trolley has a piece of paper tape attached to it. The tape passes through a machine
which makes a dot on the tape every 0.02 s.
Fig. 1.2 shows a section of the tape.
Fig. 1.2
(i)
State how the dots on the tape show that the trolley was moving with constant speed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
When the trolley reaches the point P, the ramp is tilted so that the angle x is greater.
Describe and explain the change in motion of the trolley.
description .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
3
(b) Another trolley is released from the top of the ramp.
Fig. 1.3 shows the speed–time graph for this trolley.
1.5
speed
m/s
1.0
0.5
0
0
0.5
1.0
time / s
1.5
Fig. 1.3
Using Fig. 1.3, calculate the distance travelled by the trolley in the first 0.5 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
4
(c) Fig. 1.4 shows a metal ball at rest in a tube of liquid.
metal ball
X
liquid
tube
Fig. 1.4
The ball is released and reaches terminal velocity at point X.
Explain the motion of the ball as it falls from rest until it reaches point X.
Use ideas of force and acceleration in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
5
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a cliff edge with water below it.
ball
cliff
115 m
water
Fig. 2.1
A ball falls over the edge of the cliff. The mass of the ball is 160 g. The height of the cliff is 115 m.
(a) Calculate the vertical speed of the ball as it hits the water. Air resistance can be ignored.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the vertical momentum of the ball as it hits the water.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
6
3
(a) (i)
Speed is a scalar quantity.
State one other scalar quantity.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Velocity is a vector quantity.
State one other vector quantity.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a model car travelling at constant speed on a flat circular track.
car
circular
track
Fig. 3.1
The speed of the car is 0.30 m / s. In one complete revolution around the track, the car travels
3.9 m.
(i)
Calculate the time taken for the car to complete one revolution around the track.
time = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
7
(ii)
On Fig. 3.1, draw and label with the letter F an arrow to show the resultant force acting
on the car.
[1]
(iii)
The speed of the car increases and at point P on Fig. 3.2 the car does not stay on the
track.
P
Fig. 3.2
1. Suggest, in terms of the force acting on the car, why the car does not stay on the track
at point P.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. On Fig. 3.2, draw and label an arrow with the letter S to show the direction of motion of
the car as it leaves the track at point P.
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
8
4
In Fig. 4.1, the circles represent molecules in different states of matter.
A
B
C
Fig. 4.1
(a) Identify the states A, B and C.
A ………………………………………………………..
B ………………………………………………………..
C ………………………………………………………..
[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of forces between molecules, why gases expand more than liquids when
they have the same rise in temperature. Assume that the pressure remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a cylinder and piston.
cylinder
piston
gas
Fig. 4.2
The volume of gas in the cylinder is 3400 cm3. The pressure of the gas in the cylinder is
0.90 × 105 Pa.
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
9
(i)
The piston is moved to the left and fixed in a new position. The pressure of the gas in
the cylinder increases to 2.5 × 105 Pa. Assume that the temperature of the gas does not
change.
Calculate the new volume of the gas.
volume = .......................................................... [3]
(ii)
The gas in the cylinder is now heated. The piston remains fixed in the same position as
in (c)(i).
State and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of the gas.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
10
5
Fig. 5.1 shows two metal plates A and B with a radiant heater placed midway between them.
shiny plate
dull black plate
wax
wax
cork
cork
A
B
radiant heater
Fig. 5.1
Metal plate A is shiny. Metal plate B is dull black. A piece of cork is attached to each plate using
wax. The wax is a solid at room temperature and has a melting point of 37 °C.
(a) State and explain what happens to the pieces of cork a few minutes after the heater is
switched on.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Give the name of the method of transfer of thermal energy in solid metals.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
11
6
(a) Sound waves consist of compressions and rarefactions.
Explain the terms compression and rarefaction. Give your explanation in terms of the spacing
of molecules and the pressure for sound waves in air.
compression .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A musical instrument emits a sound with a frequency of 4.4 kHz. The speed of sound in air is
340 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the wavelength of the sound.
wavelength = .......................................................... [3]
(ii)
The frequency of the sound emitted by the instrument is changed to 5.1 kHz and the
amplitude of the sound is increased.
Without calculation, state what happens to
1. the speed of the sound ..................................................................................................
2. the wavelength of the sound .........................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
12
7
(a) State two uses for infrared radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) X-rays are used in hospitals to help treat patients.
Suggest and explain three precautions for the safe use of X-rays.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) (i)
State the speed in a vacuum of
1. microwaves ............................................................................................................. [1]
2. X-rays ....................................................................................................................
(ii)
[1]
State a possible frequency for an ultrasound wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
13
8
(a) (i)
Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit. The resistor has a resistance of 4.0 Ω. The reading on
the voltmeter is 3.0 V.
A
V
Fig. 8.1
Calculate the current in the resistor.
current = .......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Fig. 8.2 shows the same circuit with one component reversed.
A
V
Fig. 8.2
State the reading on the voltmeter and explain your answer.
reading = ...............................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
14
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows the symbol for a logic gate.
X
Y
Z
Fig. 8.3
The truth table for this logic gate is shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1
input X
input Y
output Z
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
State the name of this logic gate. ……………………………………………..
(c) (i)
[1]
A student designs the circuit shown in Fig. 8.4.
A
B
C
E
D
Fig. 8.4
Complete the truth table for this circuit in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2
A
B
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
C
D
E
[3]
(ii)
A single logic gate can be used to produce output E in Fig. 8.4 with the inputs A and B
shown in Table 8.2.
State the name of this logic gate. ……………………………………….
[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
15
9
(a) Electrical power is produced in a power station by an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
The output of the generator has a voltage of 22 000 V. The electrical power is transmitted at a
voltage of 400 000 V.
Explain why electrical power is transmitted at a voltage of 400 000 V and not 22 000 V.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A computer contains a transformer.
The input voltage to the transformer is 240 V. The output voltage from the transformer is 20 V
and the output current is 2.3 A.
The efficiency of the transformer is 90%.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = .......................................................... [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
[Turn over
16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a relay.
circuit
B
contacts
M
pivot
soft-iron
armature
circuit
A
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch in circuit A is closed. Describe how this operates the motor in circuit B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The switch in circuit A is opened. The soft-iron armature is replaced with a steel armature.
The switch in circuit A is closed.
Explain what happens when the switch in circuit A is then opened.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
17
11
(a) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays directed between two metal
plates P and Q.
P
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
beam of
α-particles, β-particles
and γ-rays
Q –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Fig. 11.1
The metal plates are parallel and there is a large potential difference (p.d.) between them.
Plate P is positive and plate Q is negative.
On Fig. 11.1, draw the paths of each of the radiations between the plates and after leaving
the plates.
Label the paths α, β and γ.
[5]
(b) State and explain one practical application of γ-rays.
application ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2020
0625/43/O/N/20
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 6 4 6 1 2 2 8 1 1 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (RW/JG) 214504/3
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
Some physical quantities are scalars and other physical quantities are vectors.
(a) State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Circle the vector quantities in the list.
acceleration
energy
mass
momentum
temperature
time
speed
velocity
[2]
(c) A microphone in a recording studio has a mass of 0.55 kg and a weight W.
(i)
Calculate W.
W = .......................................................... [1]
(ii)
The microphone is suspended from the ceiling by a cord attached to a small ring. Fig. 1.1
shows the microphone pulled to one side and kept stationary by a horizontal thread.
ceiling
cord
horizontal thread
ring
microphone
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
3
The tension T in the horizontal thread is 8.1 N.
Determine graphically the magnitude and the direction, relative to the vertical, of the
resultant of W and T. Use a scale of 1.0 cm to 1.0 N or greater.
magnitude of resultant = ................................................................
direction of resultant = ................................... relative to vertical
[3]
(iii)
State and explain how the magnitude and direction of the resultant in (c)(ii) compares
with the force on the ring due to the tension in the cord.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
4
2
A student carries out an experiment using a plastic beaker that contains 0.24 kg of water at 17 °C.
The thermal capacity (heat capacity) of the beaker is negligible.
(a) Define thermal capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Several ice cubes are at a temperature of 0 °C. The ice cubes are dropped into the water and
the internal energy of the water decreases.
(i)
Give a simple molecular account of this decrease in internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the decrease in the internal energy of the water as its temperature decreases
from 17 °C to 0 °C.
decrease in internal energy = .......................................................... [2]
(c) As the temperature of the water decreases, some of the ice melts.
(i)
Explain why this ice melts.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
5
(ii)
Describe how to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of ice using this experiment.
State any other measurements that the student needs to make.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a balloon inflated with air.
Fig. 3.1
The pressure of the air at the inner surface of the balloon keeps the rubber stretched.
(a) Explain, in terms of the momentum of the molecules, why there is a pressure at the inner
surface of the balloon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The volume of the air in the balloon is 630 cm3 and the pressure of the air in the balloon is
1.0 × 105 Pa.
The balloon is tied to a heavy stone and dropped into a lake. The balloon is pulled down
quickly and the temperature of the air inside does not change.
(i)
Calculate the volume of the air when the pressure of the air is 1.4 × 105 Pa.
volume = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
7
(ii)
The balloon and stone stop moving when the stone hits the bottom of the lake. The
temperature of the air now begins to decrease.
Explain why the volume of the air in the balloon decreases as the temperature decreases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
8
4
A train of mass 1.8 × 105 kg is at rest in a station. At time t = 0, the train begins to accelerate along
a straight, horizontal track and reaches a speed of 20 m / s at t = 15 s. The train continues at a
speed of 20 m / s for 10 s.
At t = 25 s, the driver applies the brakes and the resistive force on the train causes it to decelerate
uniformly to rest in a further 24 s.
Fig. 4.1 is an incomplete distance–time graph for this journey.
600
distance / m
400
200
0
0
10
20
30
t/s
40
50
Fig. 4.1
(a) Complete Fig. 4.1 by drawing:
(i)
a line to represent the motion of the train between t = 15 s and t = 25 s
[1]
(ii)
a curve to represent the motion of the train between t = 0 and t = 15 s.
[1]
(b) Calculate the kinetic energy of the train between t = 15 s and t = 25 s.
kinetic energy = .......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
9
(c) While the train decelerates to rest, it does work against the resistive force and its kinetic
energy decreases.
(i)
Define work done.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Using Fig. 4.1, determine the distance moved by the train while it decelerates.
distance moved = .......................................................... [1]
(iii)
Calculate the resultant force acting on the train while it decelerates.
resultant force = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
10
5
(a) Explain, in terms of the behaviour of light rays, what is meant by principal focus for a thin
converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State what is meant by focal length.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A lens is used to produce a focused image of an object on a translucent screen. Fig. 5.1
shows the object O and its image I.
translucent
screen
1 cm
1 cm
O
P
I
Fig. 5.1
(i)
Consider the straight ray that passes from the tip of O to the tip of I and find the position
of the lens. Mark the position of the lens by drawing a vertical line labelled L from the top
of the grid to the bottom.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, draw a ray that passes through one of the principal focuses and determine
the focal length of the lens.
focal length = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
11
R
Object O is a printed document that includes a large letter R on the side facing the lens.
The top edge of the document corresponds to the tip of O. Fig. 5.2 shows the printed
document.
top edge
R
printed
document
R R
Fig. 5.2
R
(iii)
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.3, mark a tick in one of the boxes ( ✓ ) to indicate how the image on the
translucent screen appears to someone who is looking at the screen from point P. Explain
why the image has this appearance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
12
6
X‑rays are electromagnetic waves. Fig. 6.1 shows the position of X‑rays in the electromagnetic
spectrum arranged according to increasing wavelength.
gamma-rays
X-rays
J
K
microwaves
L
visible light
increasing wavelength
Fig. 6.1
(a) Three components of the spectrum are unnamed but labelled J, K and L.
(i)
State the names of these three components.
J ........................................................................................................................................
K ........................................................................................................................................
L ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
State which of these three components has the lowest frequency.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the frequency of X‑rays that have a wavelength of 1.2 × 10–9 m in a vacuum.
frequency = .......................................................... [3]
(c) (i)
Describe one medical use of X‑rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
13
(ii)
State one reason why it is necessary to take safety precautions when X‑rays are used.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
15
7
A plastic rod becomes negatively charged when it is rubbed with a woollen cloth.
(a) Describe, in terms of particles, how the rod becomes negatively charged when rubbed with
the cloth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A light, conducting ball is at rest on a metal table. When the rod is brought close to the ball, as
shown in Fig. 7.1, the ball jumps up towards the rod.
rod
ball
metal table
Fig. 7.1
(i)
Explain why the ball jumps up.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
The ball touches the rod and falls back down to the table.
Explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
16
8
A circuit contains two fixed resistors and a light‑dependent resistor (LDR). Fig. 8.1 shows that the
power supply is a 9.0 V battery.
9.0 V
450 Ω
800 Ω
Fig. 8.1
The current in the 450 Ω resistor is 0.012 A.
(a) State what is meant by electric current.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The current in the LDR is I1 and the current in the 800 Ω resistor is I2.
Complete the equation that relates the current in the 450 Ω resistor to I1 and I2.
current in the 450 Ω resistor = ............................................................................................. [1]
(c) Calculate the power dissipated in the 800 Ω resistor.
power = .......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
17
(d) The brightness of the light that is incident on the LDR increases.
Explain what happens to the potential difference (p.d.) across the 450 Ω resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
[Turn over
18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
19
9
Uranium‑235 (235
92U) is a radioactive isotope of uranium that occurs naturally on Earth.
(a) Describe the composition and structure of a neutral atom of uranium‑235.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Another isotope of uranium is uranium‑238.
Describe how an atom of uranium‑238 differs from an atom of uranium‑235.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) In the reactor in a nuclear power station, a nucleus of uranium‑235 absorbs a slow‑moving
neutron and then undergoes nuclear fission.
Two neutrons, a nucleus of xenon‑140 (140
54Xe) and a nucleus of an element represented by E
are produced.
Complete the equation for this fission reaction.
n + 235
92U
140Xe
54
...........
+ ........... E + 2n
[2]
(d) Xenon‑140 (140
54Xe) is radioactive. It decays by β‑emission to isotope Q.
Determine:
(i)
the proton number of Q ............................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the nucleon number of Q. ............................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/41/O/N/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 7 4 3 2 6 2 7 0 7 5 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (NF/SG) 214505/2
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a space rocket accelerating away from a launch pad.
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is a speed–time graph for the first 30 s of the rocket’s flight.
2000
speed
m/s
1500
1000
500
0
0
10
20
time / s
30
Fig. 1.2
(a) Describe how the acceleration of the rocket changes between time = 10 s and time = 30 s.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
3
(b) By drawing a tangent to the graph, determine the acceleration of the rocket at time = 25 s.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the rocket between time = 0 and time = 10 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
4
2
(a) State Hooke’s law.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows the extension–load graph for a spring.
200
extension / mm
100
0
10
0
20
load / N
30
Fig. 2.1
(i)
On Fig. 2.1, mark and label the region where the spring obeys Hooke’s law.
(ii)
Calculate the spring constant k.
[1]
k = ........................................................ [2]
(iii)
The original length of the spring is 120 mm.
Calculate the length of the spring when a load of 8.5 N is applied to the spring.
length = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
5
(c) The weight of an object is 4.0 N on a planet where the acceleration of free fall is 8.7 m / s2.
Calculate the mass of the object.
mass = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a collision at very slow speed between two cars travelling along a straight road.
car B
car A
Fig. 3.1
Car B, of mass 800 kg, is moving at 2.0 m / s and collides with car A, of mass 1000 kg, which is
stationary. After the collision, both cars travel in the same direction as the initial direction of car B.
(a) After the collision, car A moves at 1.3 m / s.
Show that the speed of car B after the collision is approximately 0.4 m / s.
[3]
(b) (i)
Calculate the impulse exerted by car A on car B.
impulse = ........................................................ [2]
(ii)
State the impulse exerted by car B on car A.
impulse = ........................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
7
4
(a) A power station uses wind energy to generate electricity.
State and explain whether this method of generating electricity is renewable.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two energy resources that do not have the Sun as their source.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) For each energy resource, state the form of energy stored in:
fossil fuels .................................................................................................................................
water behind hydroelectric dams. .............................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
8
5
(a) A thermocouple thermometer is used to determine the temperature difference between a
mixture of ice and water and liquid mercury at approximately 600 °C.
Complete Fig. 5.1 with a labelled diagram to show how the thermocouple thermometer can
be used in this way.
liquid mercury
at approximately
600 °C
mixture of
ice and water
Fig. 5.1
[3]
(b) State two other physical properties that can be used to measure temperature.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two benefits of using a thermocouple thermometer instead of a liquid-in-glass
thermometer.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows particles of a material in which a sound wave is travelling.
Fig. 6.1 (not to scale)
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark:
(i)
the centre of a compression with the letter C
[1]
(ii) the centre of a rarefaction with the letter R
[1]
(iii) one wavelength with a double-ended arrow.
[1]
(b) Circle one value from the list which is the speed of sound in water.
15 m / s
150 m / s
1500 m / s
15 000 m / s
150 000 m / s
1 500 000 m / s
[1]
(c) The wavelength of a sound wave in water is 12 cm.
Calculate the frequency of this sound wave using your value from (b).
frequency = ........................................................ [3]
(d) State and explain whether the sound in (c) is ultrasound.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light approaching face AB of a glass prism of refractive index 1.5.
A
ray of
light
B
C
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 7.1, accurately draw the path of the ray within the prism from face AB to face AC.
You will need to make a measurement from Fig. 7.1 and carry out a calculation.
[4]
(ii) Determine the angle of incidence of this ray when it strikes face AC.
angle = ........................................................ [1]
(b) Without further measurement or calculation, sketch on Fig. 7.1 the approximate path of the
ray after passing through the face AC.
[1]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows a ray of light travelling within an optical fibre.
ray of
light
optical fibre
X
Fig. 7.2
(i)
Complete the path of the ray of light to the left-hand end of the fibre.
(ii)
Name the process taking place at X. .......................................................................... [1]
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
11
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a conducting object A, initially uncharged, held on an insulating stand. The
positively charged rod B is brought close to object A.
charged rod B
conducting
object A
+
+
+
+
+
insulating stand
Fig. 8.1
(i)
On Fig. 8.1, draw the distribution of charges on object A.
(ii)
A wire is connected from object A to earth.
[2]
State and explain any movement of charge.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) There is a current in a wire of 0.65 mA for 2.2 minutes.
Calculate the charge that flows.
charge = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
13
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a cell of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V and a battery of e.m.f. 6.0 V
connected in series.
1.5 V
6.0 V
Fig. 9.1
Calculate the combined e.m.f. of the cell and the battery.
e.m.f. = ........................................................ [1]
(b) The combined resistance of the three resistors shown in Fig. 9.2 is 4.4 Ω.
2.0 Ω
I
R
3.0 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(i)
Calculate the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ........................................................ [3]
(ii)
The current I in Fig. 9.2 is 0.94 A.
Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the combination of resistors.
p.d. = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
14
10 (a) Name the logic gate shown in Fig. 10.1. ..............................................................
Fig. 10.1
[1]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a combination of logic gates.
input I
output O
Fig. 10.2
Complete the right-hand column of Table 10.1, the truth table for the combination of logic
gates. You may use the blank column for your working.
Table 10.1
output O
input I
0
1
[2]
(c) An electrical device has a metal case.
Explain the benefit of earthing the metal case.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) (i)
Explain how a fuse protects a circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
15
(ii)
The current in an electric kettle connected to the mains through a fuse is 10 A.
Fuses with the following ratings are available.
3A
9A
10 A
13 A
30 A
Circle the correct fuse rating for this appliance and explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
[Turn over
16
11
(a) Describe the composition and structure of a neutral atom of beryllium-8, which has a proton
number of 4 and a nucleon number of 8.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A radioactive isotope decays by β-emission to form an isotope of barium with nucleon
number 135.
Table 11.1
element
symbol
proton number
iodine
I
53
xenon
Xe
54
caesium
Cs
55
barium
Ba
56
lanthanum
La
57
cerium
Ce
58
praseodymium
Pr
59
Use data from Table 11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[4]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/42/O/N/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 2 8 7 9 7 4 1 8 6 8 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2021
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (PQ/FC) 214506/2
© UCLES 2021
[Turn over
2
1
A ship sails in a straight line between two ports.
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph of the ship for the first 100 minutes of its journey between
the two ports.
20
speed
m/s
15
10
5
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the maximum acceleration during the first 100 minutes of the ship’s journey.
maximum acceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the total distance travelled by the ship between time = 42 min and time = 100 min.
distance travelled = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
3
(c) At a time not shown on the graph, the acceleration of the ship is 0.0087 m / s2. The total mass
of the ship and its passengers is 2.3 × 107 kg.
(i)
Calculate the resultant force on the ship.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain why the force on the ship due to the ship’s engine is greater than the value you
calculated in (c)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a simplified version of a ‘gravity lamp’. This apparatus is used to light a
light-emitting diode (LED) without mains electricity.
attachment to ceiling
generator
LED
strap
12 kg load
Fig. 2.1
The load of 12 kg is raised to a height of 1.7 m above the ground. The load is connected to a
pulley system. The time taken for the load to fall to the ground is 1200 seconds. The load falls at
constant speed. The generator is connected to an LED.
(a) Calculate the rate of transfer of gravitational potential energy as the load falls to the ground.
rate of transfer of gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
5
(b) The light output of the LED is 0.10 W.
Calculate the efficiency of the ‘gravity lamp’.
efficiency = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest a social or environmental advantage of using a ‘gravity lamp’.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
6
3
(a) A gas bubble is released at the bottom of a lake.
Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3. The temperature
of the water in the lake is constant.
(i)
The gas bubble rises to the surface. The volume of the gas bubble increases as it rises
higher in the water.
Explain why the volume of the bubble increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The volume of the gas bubble is 0.40 cm3 when it is 3.0 m below the surface of the lake.
Calculate the volume of the gas bubble when it is 0.50 m below the surface of the lake.
volume = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
7
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of a hydraulic press used to compress paper for recycling.
force
applied
paper to be
compressed
piston A
piston B
oil
Fig. 3.1
When a force is applied to piston A, it causes a pressure in the oil. This pressure produces an
upwards force on piston B. As piston B moves, it compresses the paper.
A small quantity of air leaks into the oil.
Suggest and explain the effect the air has on the operation of the hydraulic press.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
8
4
Explain what happens to the pressure of a constant volume of air when the temperature of the air
increases. Use ideas of momentum of molecules in your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
9
5
(a) An aluminium saucepan and a steel saucepan have the same dimensions. Table 5.1 shows
the values of the specific heat capacity and the density of aluminium and of steel.
Table 5.1
metal
specific heat capacity
J / (kg °C)
density
kg / m3
aluminium
0.91
2600
steel
0.50
7600
The mass of the aluminium saucepan is 0.41 kg.
(i)
Calculate the mass of the steel saucepan.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the thermal capacity of the aluminium saucepan.
thermal capacity = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Water is heated in the steel saucepan. The initial temperature of the water and the
saucepan is 20 °C.
Calculate the energy transfer needed to raise the temperature of the steel saucepan to
100 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why metals are better thermal conductors than non-metals.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
10
6
(a) Describe an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air. State the apparatus you
need, details of how to take measurements and how to calculate the speed of sound in air.
You may use the space below to draw a labelled diagram as part of your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Sound waves from a television are diffracted through doorways. Light waves from a television
are not diffracted through doorways.
Suggest why light waves and sound waves behave differently in this situation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
11
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of green light emerging from one face of a glass prism.
prism
ray of
green light
Fig. 7.1
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, draw the path of the green light entering and passing through the prism. [2]
(ii)
The green light is monochromatic. State, in terms of a wave property, what is meant by
monochromatic light.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i)
State the speed of light in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The wavelength of green light in air is 5.2 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of green light.
frequency = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
The refractive index of glass for green light is 1.52.
Calculate the speed of green light in glass.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
12
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows two charged metal plates with a gap between them. The plates are parallel to
each other. The top plate is negatively charged and the bottom plate is positively charged.
–
–
–
–
–
+
+
+
+
+
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw five electric field lines between the two plates.
[2]
(b) An electric iron has a power of 2400 W. The potential difference (p.d.) of the mains supply is
220 V.
(i)
Calculate the electric current in the iron.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the electric charge which flows through the iron in 15 minutes.
charge = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Fuse ratings of 3 A, 5 A, 10 A, 13 A and 30 A are available.
State which of these fuse ratings is suitable for use in the iron.
fuse rating ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
13
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 shows current–potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor, a thermistor and a filament
lamp.
1.0
filament lamp
current / A 0.8
resistor
0.6
0.4
thermistor
0.2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
The resistor, the thermistor and the filament lamp are connected in series with a power supply.
(a) (i)
Draw a circuit diagram for this circuit.
[2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
15
(ii)
Add a voltmeter to your circuit diagram in (a)(i) in a correct position to measure the p.d.
across the resistor.
[1]
(iii)
Using the graph in Fig. 9.1, determine the p.d. across the terminals of the power supply
when the p.d. across the resistor is 6.0 V.
p.d. across terminals of power supply = ......................................................... [4]
(b) Describe a practical use for a thermistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
16
10 (a) A transformer has 500 turns on the primary coil and 25 turns on the secondary coil. The input
voltage is 120 V.
(i)
Calculate the output voltage.
output voltage = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
The current in the primary coil is 125 mA. The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the output current.
output current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a loose wire connected in a circuit with a d.c. (direct current) power supply
and a switch. The length of the wire between the two supports is in the magnetic field of a
horseshoe magnet.
support
S
support
N
d.c. power supply
magnet
switch
Fig. 10.1
The power supply is switched on and the wire moves down.
(i)
On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on the wire to show the direction of the current.
(ii)
The power supply is switched off and the wire returns to its original position. The power
supply is then switched on so that the current is in the opposite direction.
[1]
State and explain what happens to the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
17
(c) A split-ring commutator is an important feature of a d.c. motor.
Suggest one reason why the d.c. motor cannot operate without a split-ring commutator.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
[Turn over
18
11
(a) A detector of radioactivity is placed in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples. A
student notices that the detector shows a count rate that varies between 20 counts / min and
24 counts / min.
(i)
Suggest a source of these readings.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why these readings are not constant.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A nucleus of uranium (U) contains 92 protons and 146 neutrons. It decays by emitting an
α-particle to become a nucleus of thorium (Th).
Complete the nuclide equation for this radioactive decay.
.....
.....
U
.....
.....
.....
Th + .....α
[3]
(c) An isotope of radon has a half-life of 3.8 days. It decays by emitting α-radiation.
Calculate the time taken for 16 mg of this isotope to decay to 2 mg of this isotope.
time = ................................................ days [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2021
0625/43/O/N/21
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 2 4 5 9 8 2 4 0 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CE/SG) 301683/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
Two blocks, A and B, are joined by a thin thread that passes over a frictionless pulley. Block A is at
rest on a rough horizontal surface and block B is held at rest, just below the pulley.
Fig. 1.1 shows the thread hanging loose.
block A
pulley
thread
block B
rough horizontal surface
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
Block B is released and it falls vertically. The thread remains loose until block B has fallen a
distance of 0.45 m.
The mass of block B is 0.50 kg.
(a) Calculate the change in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of block B as it falls through
0.45 m.
change in g.p.e. ......................................................... [2]
(b) The mass of block A is 2.0 kg.
When the thread tightens, it pulls on block A which moves to the right at a speed of 0.60 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the impulse exerted on block A as it accelerates from rest to 0.60 m / s.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
3
(ii)
Both of the blocks now move at a constant speed of 0.60 m / s until block B hits the
ground and the thread becomes loose.
Explain the energy change that takes place in block A after block B stops moving.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
4
2
A force is a vector quantity.
(a) (i)
State two features of a vector quantity.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
State the names of two other quantities that are vectors.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A student suspends a spring from a clamp stand and measures the length l0 of the spring.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus.
l0
Fig. 2.1 (not to scale)
The student then suspends loads of different weights from the spring and measures the
length of the spring for each load. He then plots a graph of the length of the spring against
weight.
Fig. 2.2 is the graph that the student plots.
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
5
0.80
length / m
0.60
0.40
0.20
0
0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
12.0
weight / N
Fig. 2.2
(i)
Using Fig. 2.2, determine the initial length l0 of the spring.
l0 = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
State what is meant by the limit of proportionality and, using Fig. 2.2, determine the
weight of the load that causes this spring just to reach the limit of proportionality.
limit of proportionality ........................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
weight = .............................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii)
Using Fig. 2.2, determine the spring constant of this spring.
spring constant = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
6
3
A rock climber, of total mass 62 kg, holds herself in horizontal equilibrium against a vertical cliff.
She pulls on a rope that is fixed at the top of the cliff and presses her feet against the cliff.
Fig. 3.1 shows her position.
rope
cliff
0.90 m
60°
rock climber
1.2 m
centre of mass
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
(a) Calculate the total weight of the climber.
weight = ......................................................... [1]
(b) State the two conditions needed for equilibrium.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The climber’s centre of mass is 0.90 m from the cliff.
(i)
Calculate the moment about her feet due to her weight.
moment = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
7
(ii)
The line of the rope meets the horizontal line through her centre of mass at a distance of
1.2 m from the cliff, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The rope is at an angle of 60° to the horizontal.
Determine the tension in the rope.
tension = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
8
4
A quantity of gas is trapped by a piston in a cylinder with thin metal walls. The piston is free to
move without friction within the cylinder.
Fig. 4.1 shows the cylinder and piston.
gas
cylinder
piston
Fig. 4.1
The cylinder is placed inside a freezer.
(a) The air in the freezer is at atmospheric pressure, which is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The area of the piston
in contact with the air in the freezer is 2.4 × 10–3 m2.
(i)
Calculate the force exerted on the piston by the air in the freezer.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
When the cylinder is first placed into the freezer, the temperature of the gas in the
cylinder decreases and the air pushes the piston into the cylinder.
Calculate the work done on the piston by the air in the freezer as the air pushes the
piston a distance of 0.021 m into the cylinder.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The initial temperature of the cylinder and the gas is 21 °C and, in the freezer, the temperature
of the cylinder decreases to –18 °C.
The thermal capacity of the cylinder is 89 J / °C.
Calculate the change in the internal energy of the cylinder.
change in internal energy = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
9
(c) When the temperature reaches –18 °C, the pressure of the gas in the cylinder is still equal to
that of the atmosphere.
Explain, in terms of the particles of the gas, how the pressure remains equal to its original
value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) As the temperature of the metal cylinder decreases, the volume of the metal decreases. The
decrease in the volume of the metal is much less than the decrease in the volume of the gas.
Explain, in terms of the particles of the metal, why the decrease in the volume of the metal is
less than that of the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
10
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a heater in a bathroom.
heater
Fig. 5.1
The heater is at a very high temperature and it glows red. The manufacturer states:
“The heater emits light and radiation and it transfers thermal energy by radiation.”
(a) State the part of the electromagnetic spectrum that transfers thermal energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State:
(i)
one way in which visible light and the radiation identified in (a) are similar
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
one way in which visible light differs from the radiation identified in (a).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
11
(c) Some surfaces are better at emitting radiation than others.
(i)
Describe an experiment to show whether a black surface or a white surface is the better
emitter of radiation. You may draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
To ensure that the conclusion reached in the experiment in (c)(i) is correct, several
details of the experiment must be identical when testing the two different surfaces.
State two quantities in the experiment that you described that must be identical during
the test.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
12
6
The red light produced by a laser is monochromatic.
(a) State what is meant by monochromatic.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The red light from the laser hits the curved surface of a semicircular transparent plastic block
at point P and passes into the plastic.
The red light travels through the plastic and hits the straight edge of the block at its midpoint M.
Fig. 6.1 shows that some of the light is reflected and that some light travels in the air along
the straight edge of the plastic block.
laser
reflected light
P
red light
plastic block
37°
M
Fig. 6.1
The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
(i)
Explain why the red light does not change direction as it enters the plastic block.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
At M, the angle between the red light in the plastic and the normal is 37°.
Calculate the speed of the red light in the plastic.
speed = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
13
(iii)
In the plastic, blue light travels slightly slower than red light and so the critical angle for
blue light is smaller than the critical angle for red light.
The laser that emits red light is replaced by one that emits blue light. Now blue light
enters the block at P and hits the straight edge at M.
Explain what happens to the blue light after it hits the straight edge at M.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
14
7
The electric starter motor in a car is switched on and off using a relay.
The relay consists of a plastic case and two flexible springy strips, X and Y, which are made of
soft iron. These iron strips act as the switch when a circuit is connected between the terminals W
and Z.
Fig. 7.1 shows X, Y and the plastic case.
W
W
S
springy iron
strips
X
Y
X
12 V car
battery
Y
magnetising coil
plastic case
Z
Z
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.2 shows the equipment from Fig. 7.1 inside a magnetising coil. The magnetising coil is in
series with the 12 V car battery and switch S, which is open.
(a) Switch S is now closed.
Explain what happens to the springy iron strips X and Y.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The power of the starter motor is 1.8 kW and it is also operated by the car battery.
(i)
Calculate the current in the starter motor when it is used.
current = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
15
(ii)
The starter motor circuit is connected between terminals W and Z.
Explain why copper wires with a large cross-sectional area are used for this circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows the relay and the symbols for the car battery and the starter motor.
W
S
X
12 V car
battery
Y
Z
M
starter motor
Fig. 7.3
The springy iron strips X and Y act as the switch for the starter motor circuit.
Complete the circuit diagram for the motor circuit.
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
17
8
The unit of the two electrical quantities electromotive force (e.m.f.) and potential difference (p.d.)
is the volt (V).
(a) State one other similarity between e.m.f. and p.d.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State one difference between e.m.f. and p.d.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A battery consists of four cells, each of e.m.f. 1.2 V, in series.
(i)
Calculate the e.m.f. of the battery.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
The battery is connected in a circuit with four 12 Ω resistors. Fig. 8.1 is the circuit diagram.
V
Fig. 8.1
Calculate the total resistance of this arrangement of resistors.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(iii)
Calculate the reading on the voltmeter in Fig. 8.1.
reading = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
[Turn over
18
9
Only one isotope of gold occurs naturally on Earth.
(a) State what this indicates about the nuclear structure of all the naturally occurring atoms of
gold on Earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are several artificially produced isotopes of gold.
Gold-198 (198
79 Au) is an artificial isotope which is used in medicine and in scientific research.
Gold-198 decays by β (beta)-emission to a stable isotope of mercury.
(i)
Determine the number of protons and the number of neutrons in a nucleus of this isotope
of mercury.
number of protons = ...............................................................
number of neutrons = ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
19
(ii)
A sample of gold-198 is placed near to a radiation detector in a research laboratory. The
count rate is recorded at the same time every day for 32 days.
The results are used to plot the graph shown in Fig. 9.1.
400
count rate
counts / min
300
200
100
0
0
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
time / days
32
Fig. 9.1
Using Fig. 9.1, determine the background count rate in the research laboratory.
count rate = ......................................................... [1]
(iii)
Using Fig. 9.1, determine the half-life of gold-198.
half-life = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/41/O/N/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 8 4 4 8 2 3 2 5 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2022
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (PQ/CB) 301684/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows sea water flowing down a channel into a tank without splashing. The water is
flowing at a rate of 800 kg / min. The length and width of the tank are 3.10 m and 1.20 m. The
density of the sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
1.20 m
flowing sea water
3.10 m
channel
tank
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)
(a) Initially, the tank is empty.
Calculate the depth of water in the tank after 1.00 minute. Give your answer to three significant
figures.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
(b) The height of the water decreases by 0.420 m as it flows down the channel.
Calculate the decrease in gravitational potential energy of the water each second.
decrease in gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [3]
(c) The water stops flowing. The depth of water in the tank is 0.800 m.
Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the tank due to the water.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
3
2
(a) A pendulum swings with a time period of approximately one second.
Describe how to use a stop-watch to determine the time period of the pendulum.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Complete Table 2.1 by writing in each space of the right-hand column which one of the
following devices is used to measure the quantity in the left-hand column.
digital balance
measuring cylinder
metre rule
micrometer screw gauge
stop-watch
thermocouple
Table 2.1
quantity
device
volume of water in a glass
width of a small swimming pool
thickness of a piece of aluminium foil
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Tidal power derives most of its energy from the Moon and part of its energy from the Sun.
(i)
State one other source of power which derives its energy from the Sun.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State one source of power which does not derive its energy from the Sun.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a small water turbine driven by a tidal flow of water to generate electrical
power.
surface of sea
flow of water
sea bed
Fig. 3.1
(i)
Explain whether this method of generation of electrical power is renewable.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The mass of water passing through the turbine each second is 6.0 × 103 kg. The speed
of the water is 2.0 m / s. 40% of the kinetic energy of the water is converted to electrical
energy.
Calculate the electrical power generated.
power = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
5
4
(a) Explain, in terms of the momentum of particles, how a gas exerts a pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The temperature of a sample of gas is increased at constant volume.
State and explain any change in the pressure of the gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Another sample of gas is in a sealed container of volume 170 cm3 and exerts a pressure of
9.0 × 104 Pa. The volume of the container decreases by 70 cm3 at constant temperature.
Calculate the new pressure of the gas.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
[Turn over
6
5
Fig. 5.1 shows an aluminium block after leaving a furnace in a factory.
furnace
aluminium block
factory worker
solid metal rollers
Fig. 5.1
(a) The mass of the block is 1200 kg and it is heated in the furnace from 20 °C to 380 °C. The
aluminium block does not melt.
The specific heat capacity of aluminium is 960 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the block in the furnace.
thermal energy = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a factory worker standing 3 m from the block.
State and explain the main process by which thermal energy is transferred to the worker.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
7
(c) State and explain the main process by which thermal energy is transferred from the outer
surface of the solid metal rollers to their interior.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows a converging lens and an object OX. The focuses of the lens are labelled F.
X
F
F
O
principal axis
Fig. 6.1
(i)
On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw two rays from X which locate the image of the object. Draw the
image and label it IY.
Measure the distance from IY along the principal axis to the centre line of the lens.
distance = ...............................................................
[4]
(ii)
State two reasons why the image IY is virtual.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
9
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of green light passing into, through and out of a glass prism.
Fig. 6.2
A ray of blue light is incident on the prism on the same path as the incident ray of green light.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through and out of the prism.
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
[Turn over
10
7
This question is about the magnetic fields around bar magnets. Fig. 7.1 shows two positions used
by a student doing an experiment.
position 1
position 2
Fig. 7.1
(a) Fig. 7.2 shows a magnet, labelled magnet 1, placed on position 1.
magnet 1
S
position 2
N
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2, draw lines to show the pattern of the magnetic field produced by magnet 1.
Place arrows on the lines to show the direction of the field.
[3]
(b) Magnet 1 is removed from position 1. Fig. 7.3 shows another magnet, labelled magnet 2,
placed on position 2.
position 1
magnet 2
N
S
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3, draw, at the right-hand end of position 1, a line with an arrow to show the direction
of the magnetic field produced by magnet 2.
[1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
11
(c) Fig. 7.4 shows magnet 1 placed on position 1 and magnet 2 placed on position 2.
magnet 1
S
magnet 2
N
N
S
Fig. 7.4
(i)
State the direction of the force that the N pole of magnet 2 exerts on the N pole of
magnet 1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Justify your answer to (c)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit.
Y
V
Fig. 8.1
(a) The light intensity at the circuit increases from dark to bright.
State any effect on the resistance of component Y.
...................................................................................................................................................
State and explain any effect on the reading of the voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 8.2 is switched on for 2.0 min.
12 V
4.0 Ω
Fig. 8.2
The current in the 4.0 Ω resistor is 3.0 A and the magnitude of the charge on an electron is
1.6 × 10–19 C.
(i)
Calculate the number of electrons that pass through the resistor each second.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
Calculate the power dissipated by the resistor.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
13
9
(a) Draw the symbol for:
(i)
a diode
[1]
(ii)
a NOT gate.
[1]
(b) (i)
Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit.
Z
I1
O
I2
Fig. 9.1
Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
I1
I2
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Z
O
[2]
(ii)
State another single gate which is equivalent to the part of the circuit between I1 and Z.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
[Turn over
14
(c) Using two logic gates, design and draw a digital circuit with two inputs and two outputs which
has the truth table shown in Table 9.2.
Use either the usual logic gate symbols or correctly labelled square boxes in your diagram.
Table 9.2
input 1
input 2
output 1
output 2
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
15
10 (a) The magnitude of the charge on a β (beta)-particle is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
(i)
State the proton number and nucleon number of an α (alpha)-particle.
proton number ...................................................................................................................
nucleon number ................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Determine the magnitude of the charge of an α (alpha)-particle.
charge ...............................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) A nucleus of radium-230 consists of 88 protons and 142 neutrons. Radium-230 is radioactive
and decays by β (beta)-emission to an isotope of actinium. The symbol for radium is Ra and
the symbol for actinium is Ac.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[3]
(c) The half-life of radium-230 is 93 min. A sample contains 9.6 × 10–12 g of radium-230.
Calculate the mass of radium in the sample after 279 min.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/42/O/N/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 7 1 6 5 0 5 8 5 0 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
October/November 2022
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages.
DC (CJ/SW) 301685/2
© UCLES 2022
[Turn over
2
1
An aeroplane accelerates along a horizontal runway before take-off.
The aeroplane accelerates for 35 s. The speed of the aeroplane when it takes off is 72 m / s.
Fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of the aeroplane varies between time t = 0 and t = 35 s.
72
speed
m/s
0
0
t/s
35
Fig. 1.1
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i)
Calculate the average acceleration of the aeroplane between t = 0 and t = 35 s.
acceleration = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
The combined mass of the aeroplane, its passengers and its fuel on take-off
is 1.1 × 105 kg.
Calculate the average resultant force on the aeroplane between t = 0 and t = 35 s.
force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
3
(iii)
The force provided by the engines of the aeroplane is constant.
Give one possible explanation for the change in acceleration of the aeroplane between
t = 0 and t = 35 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
On Fig. 1.2, sketch a graph to show how the acceleration of the aircraft varies between
t = 0 and t = 35 s.
acceleration
0
0
t/s
Fig. 1.2
35
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a tennis ball approaching a tennis racket.
Fig. 2.1
The tennis ball hits the racket at a speed of 52 m / s. The average force on the ball during the
time that it is in contact with the racket is 350 N. The speed of the ball after it leaves the racket is
26 m / s in the opposite direction to the initial speed of the ball. The mass of the ball is 58 g.
(a) (i)
Calculate the change in momentum of the ball while it is in contact with the racket.
change in momentum = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
State an equation which defines impulse in terms of force and time.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Calculate the time that the racket is in contact with the ball.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the difference between the values of the kinetic energy of the ball before and after
the impact with the racket.
difference in kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows the cross-section of a barrage built across a tidal bay. The barrage is part of a tidal
power station.
high water
level
barrage
low water level
tidal
bay
gates
open sea
turbine connected to
generator
Fig. 3.1
The gates are raised to be open when the tide comes in. The gates are lowered to close when it is
high tide. Fig. 3.1 shows the water levels in the open sea and the tidal bay when it is low tide. The
gates are raised and water flows through the turbine.
(a) Complete the sentences to describe the energy transfers which take place when the gates
are opened.
Use words from the list.
tidal bay
kinetic
open sea
turbines
gates
gravitational potential
water
................................................... energy of the ................................................... in the
.................................................. is transferred to ................................................. energy in the
rotating .............................................. . This energy is used in the generator to produce
electrical power.
[3]
(b) State one advantage and one disadvantage of tidal power as an energy resource.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State the main source of energy for tidal energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer labelled thermometer X.
thermometer X
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 °C
bulb
Fig. 4.1
(i)
State the physical property which varies with temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Thermometer Y has a bulb that contains twice the volume of liquid compared to
thermometer X.
State and explain how the sensitivity of thermometer Y compares with the sensitivity of
thermometer X.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii)
State and explain one change that can be made to the design of thermometer X to
increase its range.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A liquid-in-glass thermometer cannot measure a temperature of 1300 °C.
State a physical property which varies with temperature in a thermometer which can measure
a temperature of 1300 °C.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
7
5
(a) Three identical dishes, A, B and C, contain an equal volume of water.
Dish A is outside in sunlight and experiences no wind during the day. Dish B is outside in
sunlight and experiences a strong wind during the day. Dish C is in a dark room.
Water evaporates from each dish. After 12 hours, a student measures the volume of water
in each dish. Dish C contains the largest volume of water and dish B contains the smallest
volume of water.
Explain, in terms of particles, why the three dishes have different volumes of water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Define specific latent heat of vaporisation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
8
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows an insulating beaker, crushed ice, an immersion heater and a thermometer.
to the
power supply
thermometer
insulating
beaker
immersion heater
crushed ice
Fig. 5.1
The initial temperature of the ice is –60 °C.
The immersion heater is switched on and the temperature is recorded at equal intervals of
time.
Fig. 5.2 shows the temperature–time graph.
D
temperature
C
B
A
time
Fig. 5.2
Describe what occurs in each of the sections A, B, C and D.
A ...............................................................................................................................................
B ...............................................................................................................................................
C ...............................................................................................................................................
D ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows wave crests and the direction of travel for a water wave approaching a barrier in a
large ripple tank.
large
ripple tank
direction of
travel
wave
crests
barrier
Fig. 6.1
The wavelength of the wave is 1.6 cm.
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw:
(i)
the direction of travel of the reflected wave
[1]
(ii)
three successive reflected wave crests.
[2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
10
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows an identical wave approaching a barrier with a gap of 1.3 cm.
large
ripple tank
wave
crests
barrier
with gap
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three successive wave crests after they pass through the gap in the barrier.
[3]
(c) The frequency of the wave is 4.0 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the wave.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
11
7
(a) State what is meant by total internal reflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light from a light source in a tank containing a liquid.
tank
x
liquid
ray of light
light source
Fig. 7.1
The ray of light strikes the surface of the liquid at an angle x.
(i)
The refractive index of the liquid is 1.5.
Calculate the largest value of x for which total internal reflection can occur.
x = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the speed of light in the liquid.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows apparatus used to charge a metal plate by induction.
positively charged
plastic rod
metal plate
lead connected
to earth
insulator
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe and explain how the apparatus shown in Fig. 8.1 can be used to charge the metal
plate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows an electric circuit.
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of flow of electrons and explain how you
determined the direction.
explanation ......................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
13
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with an alternating current (a.c.) supply, a resistor and a diode.
Fig. 9.1
The frequency of the power supply is 50 Hz.
(a) Calculate the time period (time for one complete cycle) of the a.c. supply.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The peak potential difference (p.d.) across the resistor is 340 V.
p.d. / V
0
0
time / s
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2:
(i)
sketch a graph to show how the p.d. across the resistor varies with time for two cycles
[2]
(ii)
label the p.d. axis with the value of p.d. at the peak
[1]
(iii)
label the time axis with two values of time.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
14
10 (a) A cloud chamber can be used to detect α (alpha)-particles and β (beta)-particles. Alcohol in
the cloud chamber exists as a vapour and condenses on ions produced in the air. This forms
visible tracks.
Fig. 10.1 shows the tracks when a source of α-particles and β-particles is present in the cloud
chamber.
cloud chamber
alcohol vapour
in air
source of
α-particles
and β-particles
Fig. 10.1
Some of the tracks are short and thick. Other tracks are longer and thinner.
State and explain which tracks are produced by α-particles and which tracks are produced by
β-particles.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A radioactive isotope of sodium (Na) is used to detect leaks from water pipes. A nucleus of
this isotope of sodium contains 11 protons and 13 neutrons. This nucleus decays by emitting
a β-particle to form a nucleus of magnesium (Mg).
(i)
Describe what is meant by an isotope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
15
(ii)
Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of this isotope of sodium to magnesium.
[3]
(iii)
This isotope of sodium has a half-life of 15 hours. The isotope of magnesium is stable
and does not undergo radioactive decay.
Suggest why these properties of the isotope of sodium and the isotope of magnesium
make this isotope of sodium suitable to detect leaks from water pipes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
[Turn over
16
11
(a) Fig. 11.1 shows a solenoid connected to a battery.
solenoid
battery
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the magnetic field inside and around the solenoid. Indicate
the direction of the magnetic field with an arrow.
[3]
(b) Electrical power is transmitted at a voltage of 400 kV. A transformer reduces the voltage to
33 kV for use by heavy industry in large factories. The number of turns on the primary coil of
the transformer is 11 000.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil of the transformer.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2022
0625/43/O/N/22
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 6 1 8 3 5 4 3 9 1 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (SL) 335358/3 R
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
1
A girl holds a rubber ball out of a window of a tall building. The mass of the ball is 0.20 kg. The ball
is at rest 10 m above a concrete path.
(a) Calculate the gravitational potential energy of the ball relative to the concrete path.
gravitational potential energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The girl releases the ball and it falls towards the path. The ball strikes the path and bounces
vertically upwards.
Fig. 1.1 shows the ball falling towards the path.
ball
10 m
concrete path
Fig. 1.1
The speed of the ball immediately before it strikes the path is 14 m / s.
The speed of the ball immediately after it strikes the path is 12 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the kinetic energy of the ball immediately after it strikes the concrete path.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Show that the change in momentum of the ball when it bounces off the path is 5.2 kg m / s.
[3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
3
(iii)
The ball is in contact with the path for 0.25 s.
Calculate the average resultant force on the ball when it is in contact with the path.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
[Turn over
4
2
A copper cooking pan contains water. Fig. 2.1 shows the pan on a hotplate of a cooker.
Fig. 2.1
Copper is a metal.
(a) Thermal energy is conducted through all solids by lattice vibrations.
Describe one other way in which thermal energy is conducted through the copper.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The outside surface of the cooking pan is kept clean by regular polishing.
Explain one other advantage of keeping the surface of the pan shiny.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The thermal energy passes into the water through the base of the pan.
Identify the main method by which thermal energy is transferred throughout the water.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
5
3
Liquids are difficult to compress whereas gases can be compressed easily.
(a) Explain, in terms of particles, why it is difficult to compress liquids.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block floating in water. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
rectangular block
atmosphere
water
0.087 m
base
Fig. 3.1
The area of the base of the block is 0.014 m2. The base of the block is at a depth of 0.087 m
below the surface of the water.
(i)
Show that the pressure due to the water at the base of the block is approximately 850 Pa.
[2]
(ii)
Calculate the force F on the base of the block caused by the pressure given in (b)(i).
F = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Force F is equal to the weight of the block.
Calculate the mass of the block.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
[Turn over
6
4
A radio transmitter is a very tall, thin cylinder. It is prevented from falling over by wires which have
one end fixed to the transmitter and the other end fixed in the ground. The ends of the wires in the
ground are a long distance from the transmitter.
Fig. 4.1 shows the transmitter and two of the wires.
transmitter
G
wire W
ground
base
Fig. 4.1
(a) The centre of gravity G is shown on Fig. 4.1.
(i)
State what is meant by centre of gravity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain why the radio transmitter without the wires is a very unstable structure.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Wire W is under tension and it exerts a force T on the transmitter.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, mark an arrow to show the force T exerted by wire W on the transmitter. [1]
(ii)
The force T produces a moment on the transmitter about its base.
Describe how the moment produced by T is calculated and indicate on Fig. 4.1 what is
meant by any other terms in the description.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
7
(c) The radio transmitter uses radio waves to transmit radio and television programmes.
State one other use of radio waves.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
[Turn over
8
5
Many methods of generating electrical power involve the use of water.
(a) Describe one method of generating electrical power from energy stored in water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) For the method you chose in (a), state one advantage and one disadvantage of generating
electricity this way.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two methods of generating electrical power for which the main source of energy is not
the Sun.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
9
6
A page of printed text is placed 18 cm from a converging lens of focal length 35 cm.
Fig. 6.1 is a scale diagram of the arrangement with each of the two principal focuses (focal points)
of the lens labelled F.
5.0 cm
5.0 cm
F
F
18 cm
page of printed text
lens
Fig. 6.1
(a) A length of 1.0 cm on the scale diagram represents an actual length of 5.0 cm.
(i)
By drawing on Fig. 6.1, locate the image of the page produced by the lens and label it I. [3]
(ii)
Using Fig. 6.1, determine the actual distance of image I from the lens.
actual distance from lens = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Converging lenses can be used as magnifying glasses.
State whether the image produced when a lens is used as a magnifying glass is real or
virtual. Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Suggest how someone who is long-sighted may benefit from using a converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
[Turn over
10
7
(a) A plastic rod is uncharged.
When the rod is rubbed with a woollen cloth, the rod becomes negatively charged.
Explain, in terms of particles, why the rod becomes negatively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a negatively charged metal sphere S.
–
–
–
–
–
sphere S
Fig. 7.1
There is an electric field surrounding S.
(i)
State what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 7.1, draw the pattern of the electric field surrounding sphere S and indicate its
direction.
[2]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows a small negative charge Z placed near to sphere S.
–
–
–
–
–
Z
sphere S
Fig. 7.2
Charge Z experiences a force due to the electric field surrounding S.
On Fig. 7.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of this force on Z.
[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
[Turn over
12
8
A cylinder is made of modelling clay. The modelling clay is an electrical conductor.
Fig. 8.1 shows the cylinder.
cross-sectional area
length
Fig. 8.1
The cylinder is connected into a circuit.
Fig. 8.2 shows that the circuit also includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 9.0 V and a
resistor P.
9.0 V
P
cylinder of modelling clay
Fig. 8.2
The resistance of P is 4.0 Ω. The current in P is 1.5 A.
(a) Calculate:
(i)
the magnitude X of the charge that flows through P in 600 s
X = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the resistance of the cylinder of modelling clay.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
13
(b) The cylinder is removed from the circuit and replaced with a new cylinder made of the same
modelling clay.
The new cylinder is twice the length and has half the cross-sectional area of the first cylinder.
Calculate the time that it now takes for a charge of magnitude X to flow through resistor P.
time = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
[Turn over
14
9
Many household smoke alarms contain a sample of the radioactive isotope americium-241 (Am).
(a) Americium-241 is the isotope of the element americium that has the nucleon number (mass
number) 241.
(i)
State how the composition of a nucleus of americium-241 differs from that of a nucleus
of americium-242.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
An atom of a different element has a nucleon number of 241.
State two differences between the composition of a nucleus of this atom and a nucleus
of americium-241.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Americium-241 decays to an isotope of neptunium (Np) by alpha-particle (α-particle) emission.
(i)
Complete the equation for this decay.
241
Am
.....
(ii)
.....
Np
93
+
.....
α
.....
[3]
One reason for using an isotope that emits α-particles in a smoke detector is that
α-particles are more strongly ionising than beta-particles (β-particles).
Explain why α-particles are more strongly ionising than β-particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
The isotope of neptunium produced by americium-241 is also radioactive.
The decay of this isotope of neptunium produces an isotope of protactinium which
decays by β-emission. β-particles are more penetrating than α-particles.
The half-life of neptunium is longer than two million years.
Using this information, explain the advantage of this long half-life for the use and safe
disposal of a household smoke alarm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
15
10 The Milky Way is one of many billions of galaxies. Each galaxy contains many billions of stable stars.
(a) Stable stars transfer energy into space by emitting electromagnetic radiation from their
surfaces.
Describe what happens in the core of a stable star to release energy that is eventually
transferred into space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) On the Earth, light from a distant galaxy is observed and analysed by astronomers. This
information is used to determine the speed at which the galaxy is moving away from the
Earth.
(i)
Describe how the observed light is different from when it was emitted.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State the quantity that astronomers use to determine the speed at which the galaxy is
moving away.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The Hubble constant H0 is equal to 2.2 × 10–18 per second.
(i)
Calculate the distance from the Earth of a galaxy that is moving away at a speed of
1.3 × 107 m / s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate an estimate for the age of the Universe. Give your answer in years.
age of the Universe = ............................................... years [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/41/O/N/23
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 6 7 1 3 1 8 1 1 0 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
October/November 2023
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages.
DC (CJ/FC) 318547/5
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
1
A car accelerates uniformly in a straight line from rest at time t = 0. At t = 3.2 s, the speed of the car
is 13.0 m / s.
(a) (i)
Calculate the acceleration of the car.
acceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain in words what is meant by the term acceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The car travels at 13.0 m / s from t = 3.2 s to t = 12.0 s.
(i)
Plot the speed–time graph for the car from t = 0 to t = 12.0 s.
14.0
speed
m/s
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0
t/s
[2]
(ii)
Determine the distance travelled by the car between t = 0 and t = 3.2 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
3
(c) The car decelerates from 13.0 m / s to 0 m / s at a constant deceleration. The mass of the car is
1350 kg. The car travels 13 m in 2.0 s as it decelerates.
Show that the work done by the car as it decelerates is approximately 1.1 × 105 J.
[4]
(d) On another day, the car in (c) travels a longer distance while it decelerates from 13.0 m / s to
0 m / s. The deceleration is constant.
Suggest and explain what causes the stopping distance to increase.
suggestion ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 13]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows an electric tumble dryer used to dry wet clothes.
drum
hot air blows
into drum
clothes
heating element
cool air
leaves condenser
condenser
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) Hot air blows into the drum. The air gains water vapour from the clothes and then leaves the
drum. The moist air enters the condenser. Cool air leaves the condenser, passes through the
heating element and enters the drum again.
(i)
State the process by which the hot air removes water from the wet clothes.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The air is cooled as it passes through the condenser.
Describe and explain one other way in which the air leaving the condenser is different
from the air entering the condenser.
description .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The drum of the tumble dryer rotates, lifting up the wet clothes which then fall down through
the hot air.
(i)
Name the force that causes the clothes to fall down.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
When the drum rotates too fast the clothes remain in contact with the wall of the drum.
State the direction of the resultant force on the clothes during the circular motion.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
5
(c) Suggest why using a clothesline to dry clothes in the open air is better for the environment
than using an electric tumble dryer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
6
3
(a) A balloon of mass 15 g is glued to a straw. The straw is threaded onto a horizontal string, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
The balloon is filled with air and then the air is released.
horizontal
string
direction of motion of balloon
hollow straw fixed to balloon
balloon
Fig. 3.1
As the air leaves the balloon, the balloon experiences a force.
The balloon accelerates from rest until it reaches a constant speed. It then travels 0.67 m in
0.18 s at this constant speed.
(i)
Explain in words what is meant by the term impulse.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the resultant impulse on the balloon while it is accelerating.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
(iii)
Explain how momentum is conserved as the balloon accelerates.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
7
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the directions of two forces acting on a different balloon as it moves.
0.40 N force
0.74 N force
Fig. 3.2 (not to scale)
Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the balloon.
magnitude ...............................................................
direction relative to horizontal force ...............................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
8
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a bottle part-filled with water. The air inside the bottle is at the same pressure as
the air outside the bottle. The bottle and its contents are at room temperature.
bottle
air
water
Fig. 4.1
(a) The temperature of the bottle and its contents are increased.
(i)
Explain, in terms of particles, how the air pressure inside the bottle changes as the
temperature increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
The lid is removed from the bottle.
State and explain how the air pressure inside the bottle changes.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
9
(b) The mass of water in the bottle is 0.18 kg. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy needed to increase the temperature of the water by 20 °C.
thermal energy = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Another plastic bottle is filled to the top with water. The height of the bottle is 40.0 cm. The
density of water is 1.0 × 103 kg / m3.
Calculate the pressure difference between the top and bottom of the water.
pressure difference = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
10
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a road junction, a moving car and a stationary truck. The road has high walls on
each side.
X
truck
car
Fig. 5.1
(a) The driver of the truck is at position X. The car moves around the corner.
On Fig. 5.1, label a point Y on the road where the truck driver first sees the car.
[1]
(b) A plane mirror is placed at the road junction as shown in Fig. 5.2.
X
truck
car
Fig. 5.2
Show how this mirror allows the driver of the truck to see the car when it is at the position
shown in Fig. 5.2.
[2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
11
(c) The truck driver wears spectacles to correct long-sightedness. Fig. 5.3 shows how a blurred
image of an object O forms on the retina. Any effect of the cornea on the rays of light can be
ignored.
lens
retina
O
cornea
Fig. 5.3
On Fig. 5.4, show how long-sightedness is corrected by:
•
•
adding a suitable lens in front of the eye
continuing the path of the three rays of light until they meet to form an image.
lens
retina
O
Fig. 5.4
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
12
6
Fig. 6.1 shows the circuit diagram for a flashlight (torch).
Fig. 6.1
The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is 4.5 V. The circuit contains a 60 Ω fixed resistor.
The current in the light-emitting diode (LED) is 0.020 A.
(a) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the LED.
p.d. = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why the LED does not light up if the battery is reversed.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The chemical energy stored in the battery is 1050 J.
Show that the flashlight operates for approximately 3 h.
[2]
(d) Calculate the total charge that flows through the LED in 3600 s.
charge = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
13
7
Fig. 7.1 shows some uses of electromagnetic radiation and different regions of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
use of electromagnetic
radiation
region of electromagnetic
spectrum
Bluetooth headset
gamma rays
thermal imaging
radio waves
photography of
people’s faces
infrared
sterilising medical
equipment
visible light
Fig. 7.1
(a) Draw a line from each use to the correct region of the spectrum. Each region of the spectrum
is used once. One line has been completed for you.
[2]
(b) State the speed of electromagnetic waves in a vacuum.
speed = ......................................................... [1]
(c) A Bluetooth headset can be used to listen to music on a mobile (cell) phone without the need
for wires to connect the headset to the phone.
(i)
The headset uses frequencies in the range 2.40–2.48 GHz.
Calculate the wavelength of the radio waves when the frequency is in the middle of the
frequency range.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
Suggest why a Bluetooth headset only works well over short distances.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
14
8
The isotope uranium-235 is represented by
235
92 U.
(a) State what the numbers 92 and 235 represent in this symbol.
92 is ..........................................................................................................................................
235 is ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Uranium-235 is a fuel used in nuclear reactors.
(i)
State the process by which energy is released from uranium-235 in a nuclear reactor.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
A nuclide equation for this process is
235
1
92 U + 0 n
140
94
1
54 Xe + 38 Sr + 2 0 n.
Describe the mass and energy changes that take place during this process in a nuclear
reactor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i)
Describe how thermal energy from nuclear reactions is used to generate electricity in a
power station.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
State one advantage and one disadvantage of using nuclear fuels in a power station
instead of using fossil fuels.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
15
9
Table 9.1 gives information about three planets in the Solar System.
Table 9.1
planet
mass
/ 1024 kg
average
distance
from Sun
/ 106 km
orbital
period
/ days
gravitational field strength at surface
N / kg
Earth
5.97
149.6
365.2
9.8
778.6
4331
23.1
108.2
224.7
8.9
Jupiter
X
1898
4.87
(a) State the name of planet X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Describe the relationship shown in Table 9.1 between the mass of a planet and the
gravitational field strength at its surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Explain why ‘distance from Sun’ in Table 9.1 is an average value.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Show that the average orbital speed of the Earth is approximately 30 km / s.
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
[Turn over
16
10 Complete the sentences about the life cycle of stars.
(a) Protostars are formed from .......................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A protostar becomes a stable star when ...................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
is balanced by ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The initial fuel used to power nuclear reactions in stars is .................................................... [1]
(d) Stars that are approximately the same size as the Sun become red giant stars which then
form a ........................................................................................................................................
with a white dwarf star at its centre.
[1]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/42/O/N/23
Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 6 9 8 3 2 6 0 5 6 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2023
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (LK/SG) 321610/4
© UCLES 2023
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Oil of density 0.80 g / cm3 is poured gently onto the surface of water of density 1.0 g / cm3. The
oil and the water do not mix.
Describe and explain the final position of the oil relative to the water.
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An irregularly shaped solid object has a density of 2.7 g / cm3.
(i)
Describe a method to measure the volume of the irregularly shaped solid object.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The volume of the object is 83 cm3.
Calculate the mass of the object.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
3
2
(a) Fig. 2.1 is a graph that shows how the extension of a spring varies with the load suspended
from it.
extension / cm
4.0
0
0
14
load / N
Fig. 2.1
(i)
Determine the spring constant of this spring.
spring constant = ......................................................... [3]
(ii)
On Fig. 2.1, mark the limit of proportionality and label this point L.
[1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a car travelling at constant speed around corner A on a road.
corner B
corner A
CA
R
Fig. 2.2
(i)
On Fig. 2.2, mark with an arrow the direction of the resultant force acting on the car as it
travels around corner A.
[2]
(ii)
Corner B has a smaller radius than corner A. The car travels at the same speed around
corner B as around corner A.
State how the resultant force changes due to the car travelling around a corner of smaller
radius.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a boy throwing a ball at an object in a fairground.
object
Fig. 3.1
The ball has a mass of 190 g and travels horizontally with a constant speed of 6.9 m / s.
(a) Calculate the momentum of the ball.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) After hitting the object, the ball bounces back along the same straight path with a speed of
1.5 m / s. The object has a mass of 1.8 kg.
Calculate the speed of the object after it is hit by the ball.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
5
(c) The kinetic energy of the ball is 4.5 J before the collision and 0.2 J after the collision.
Calculate the change in total kinetic energy of the ball and object during the collision.
change in total kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
[Turn over
6
4
(a) The lowest possible temperature is zero kelvin (0 K).
(i)
State the name of this lowest possible temperature.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Nitrogen boils at 77 K.
Calculate the boiling point of nitrogen on the Celsius scale.
boiling point = .................................................... °C [2]
(b) The temperature of a fixed mass of gas at constant volume changes from 300 K to 400 K.
State and explain, in terms of particles, the effect on the pressure of the gas.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) A sample of gas is at a pressure of 120 kPa. The volume of the gas is doubled at constant
temperature.
Calculate the new pressure of the gas.
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
7
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 is a scale diagram of wavefronts of red light approaching a gap in a barrier.
wavelength
barrier
wavefronts
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1, draw three wavefronts after the wave has passed through the gap.
[3]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the same barrier and gap. A wave of blue light approaches this barrier.
barrier
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2:
•
•
draw three wavefronts of this wave before it reaches the barrier
draw three wavefronts after the wave passes through the gap.
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
[Turn over
8
6
(a) On Fig. 6.1, sketch the current–voltage graph of a filament lamp and explain its shape.
Fig. 6.1
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows an electric circuit.
12.0 V
+
–
3.0 V
4.2 Ω
A
2.1 Ω
V
Fig. 6.2
(i)
Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
9
(ii)
Calculate the current in the 4.2 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
Determine the current in the 2.1 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [1]
(iv)
Determine the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ......................................................... [1]
(v)
Calculate the electrical power transferred in the 4.2 Ω resistor.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows the electric field pattern around point X.
X
Y
Fig. 7.1
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow to indicate the direction of the force on a negative point
charge placed at point Y.
[2]
(ii)
State what is at point X to produce the field pattern shown in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A piece of plastic is charged positively by friction.
State what charge transfers occur during this process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Explain how the structure of an electrical conductor differs from the structure of an electrical
insulator.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
11
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows the single turn coil of a simple direct current (d.c.) motor.
S
N
current
coil
O
Fig. 8.1
(i)
Explain the direction of the turning effect as seen by an observer at O.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
The coil is replaced by an otherwise identical new coil with three turns and the same
current in the coil.
State how the turning effect compares with the turning effect in (i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
A third coil is identical to the coil in (i) except that its resistance is three times greater.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the coil is the same as the p.d. in (i).
State how the turning effect compares with the turning effect in (i).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
[Turn over
12
(b) Fig. 8.2 is a voltage–time graph showing the output of a simple alternating current (a.c.)
generator at times t0, t1, t2 and t3.
voltage
time
t0 t1
t2
t3
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.3 is an end view of the plane of the coil of the generator at time t0. The coil is rotating
clockwise.
A
axis of rotation
B
Fig. 8.3
(i)
Draw an end view of the position of the plane of the coil at time t1. Include the labels
A and B.
[1]
(ii)
Draw an end view of the position of the plane of the coil at time t2. Include the labels
A and B.
[1]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
13
(iii)
Draw an end view of the position of the plane of the coil at time t3. Include the labels
A and B.
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
[Turn over
14
9
(a) For each application of radioactive isotopes, state and explain which type of radioactive
emission is suitable and suggest an appropriate half-life for the isotope.
(i)
household smoke alarm
type of radioactive emission ..............................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
half-life ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii)
measuring the thickness of aluminium strips produced in a factory
type of radioactive emission ..............................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
half-life ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Lead-208 (208
82Pb) has the highest nucleon number of the stable isotopes of lead.
Explain why lead-214 (214
82Pb) is radioactive.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State two different sources of background radiation.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
15
10 (a) (i)
1. State what is represented in space physics by the symbol H0.
............................................................................................................................... [1]
2. Write down the equation that defines H0 in terms of the speed that a far galaxy is
moving away from the Earth and its distance from the Earth.
............................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The numerical value of H0 is 2.2 × 10–18. State the unit of H0.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Use this value of H0 to determine an estimate for the age of the Universe in seconds.
age of the Universe = ...................................................... s [2]
(b) State when cosmic microwave background radiation (CMBR) was formed and where we
detect it coming from.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2023
0625/43/O/N/23
* 0000800000001 *
,
,
Cambridge IGCSE™
¬WŠ. 4mHuOªEŠ]|6€W
¬]={P¢£©O‰t\3\;A‘‚
¥ 5•u•eUUE•EE•¥u•U
* 9 6 6 5 6 1 3 7 1 5 *
PHYSICS
0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2024
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CE/CB) 336627/3
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
2
,
1
,
A spring is suspended from a clamp. Fig. 1.1 shows a pointer attached to the lower end of the
spring.
cm
metre ruler
10
20
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000002 *
40
50
pointer
60
70
80
loads
90
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàú¸þ×
ĬÝ¿üÍĦħÿèøĆ·ċâċùęĂ
ĥÕåĕµõĥµĥąÅąÅÕąµµÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
A student suspends loads of different weights from the spring and records the readings on the
metre ruler.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
spring
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
30
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000003 *
3
,
,
Fig. 1.2 is the reading–weight graph that the student obtains.
80
70
reading / cm
60
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
50
40
30
20
10
0
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
weight / N
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i)
Using Fig. 1.2, determine the reading on the metre ruler when
1. no weight is attached to the spring ................................................................................
2. a weight of 5.6 N is attached to the spring .....................................................................
[1]
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
0
Calculate the extension of the spring when the weight attached is 5.6 N.
extension = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Using the values found in (a), calculate the spring constant of the spring.
spring constant = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàü¸þ×
ĬÝÀûÕĤīïÑĂûòÏÚÏùĩĂ
ĥÕÕÕõĕąÕõõĕąÅµĥõåÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
,
(c) An object of mass 0.50 kg is attached to the spring.
(i)
Calculate the weight of the object.
weight = ......................................................... [1]
(ii)
The object is pulled downwards until the tension in the spring is 6.5 N.
The object is released.
Calculate the acceleration of the object immediately after it is released.
acceleration = ......................................................... [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
4
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000004 *
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞú¸Ā×
ĬÝÀúÕĪęúæĀôùíöíĩđĂ
ĥĥąÕµĕąõĕÕĥąąµÅõµÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000005 *
,
© UCLES 2024
,
5
BLANK PAGE
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞü¸Ā×
ĬÝ¿ùÍĠĕĊÓúý°éþéĩġĂ
ĥĥõĕõõĥĕąåµąąÕåµåÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
6
2
,
A drag car is a racing car that is powered by a rocket engine.
A drag car accelerates uniformly from rest until it reaches the finishing line. The engine is then
switched off and a parachute opens. The car decelerates until it stops.
Fig. 2.1 shows a drag car decelerating after a race.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
parachute
drag car
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Fig. 2.1
This drag car has a mass of 1400 kg.
Fig. 2.2 is the speed–time graph for the car during a race on a straight horizontal track.
160
140
speed
m/s
120
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
4
8
12
16
20
time / s
Fig. 2.2
The car reaches its maximum speed of 130 m / s at a time of 6.5 s.
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßüµþ×
ĬÝÀùÒĦíĄÛíðÅÉöÌÁđĂ
ĥµÕĕõÕĥµÅÅĕąÅÕąõõÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000006 *
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000007 *
7
,
(a) (i)
Calculate the maximum momentum of the car during the race.
maximum momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
State the feature of Fig. 2.2 that represents the distance travelled by the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Determine the distance travelled by the car in the first 6.5 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The parachute opens at 6.5 s and the car decelerates.
Describe how Fig. 2.2 shows that, after 6.5 s:
(i)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
the car decelerates
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the deceleration of the car is not constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe the energy transfer that takes place as the car slows down.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßúµþ×
ĬÝ¿úÚĤñôÞċāĄčþĐÁġĂ
ĥµåÕµµąÕÕµÅąÅµĥµĥÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
8
,
3
,
(a) Define the moment of a force and describe the effect that it measures.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000008 *
(b) A large rectangular block of stone has a square base of side 3.4 m. Fig. 3.1 shows the block
at rest on a horizontal surface.
3.4 m
G
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
X
Fig. 3.1
The block is of uniform density and the centre of gravity G is at its centre.
(i)
Explain what is meant by centre of gravity.
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
horizontal surface
(ii)
The weight of the block is 1.3 × 107 N.
Calculate the moment of the weight of the block about corner X.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝüµĀ×
ĬÝ¿ûÚĪăõÙąĊċ¯â®ÑęĂ
ĥąõÕõµąõµĕµąąµÅµõÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
moment of weight = ......................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000009 *
9
,
,
(c) The block shown in Fig. 3.1 is in equilibrium.
State the two different conditions that apply when an object is in equilibrium.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝúµĀ×
ĬÝÀüÒĠÿąàó÷¾īÚĪÑĩĂ
ĥąąĕµÕĥĕåĥĥąąÕåõĥÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
10
,
4
,
(a) Describe an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of aluminium. You may draw
a diagram.
Include in your answer:
the measurements made
any equations needed.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
•
•
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000010 *
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) An aluminium dish is initially at room temperature. Boiling water is poured into the aluminium
dish as shown in Fig. 4.1.
boiling water
aluminium dish
table surface
Fig. 4.1
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàü·þ×
ĬݾûÓĬċģ×þāáÓäÚĩġĂ
ĥÕĕĕõµåõĕåµÅąĕŵÅÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000011 *
11
,
(i)
,
Explain why, after a short time, the dish and the water are the same temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii)
Explain, in terms of its particles, why the aluminium expands as the boiling water is
poured into the dish.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii)
The water in the dish evaporates.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Explain, in terms of the water molecules, what is meant by evaporation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàú·þ×
ĬݽüÛĞćēâüðĨćÜþĩđĂ
ĥÕĥÕµÕÅĕąÕĥÅąõåõÕÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
12
,
5
,
A loudspeaker produces a sound wave in air. The distance between the centre of a compression
and the centre of a neighbouring rarefaction is 0.10 m.
(a) Calculate the wavelength of the sound wave.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000012 *
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) (i)
Calculate the frequency of the sound from the loudspeaker.
frequency = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Explain whether the sound from the loudspeaker is audible to a human with normal
hearing.
...........................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2024
ĬÙĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞü·Ā×
ĬݽùÛĨõĖÕö÷ğåøàùĩĂ
ĥĥµÕõÕŵĥõĕÅÅõąõÅÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
wavelength = ......................................................... [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000013 *
13
,
,
(d) Another loudspeaker produces a sound of wavelength 0.40 m. Sound from the loudspeaker
reaches a sound absorbing surface with a gap of width 0.80 m at the centre.
Fig. 5.1 shows the arrangement.
J
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
gap
0.80 m
K
loudspeaker
sound absorbing surface
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Fig. 5.1
Explain whether it is possible to detect sound from the loudspeaker at either point J or at
point K.
point J .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
point K ......................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÛĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞú·Ā×
ĬݾúÓĢùĦäĄĊêñĀüùęĂ
ĥĥÅĕµµåÕõąÅÅÅĕĥµÕÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
6
,
A potential divider is made by connecting a light-dependent resistor (LDR) and a thermistor in
series. Fig. 6.1 shows the potential divider, a voltmeter and a direct current (d.c.) power supply
connected into a circuit.
+
–
V
Fig. 6.1
The voltmeter measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the LDR.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
14
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000014 *
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the supply is E.
Describe how the p.d. across the thermistor can be determined using the reading on the
voltmeter.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(a) Define potential difference (p.d.).
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝù¶Ă×
ĬݽüÒĠĆĎÒĆýąÍÕðÉđĂ
ĥÅÅÕõÕĥõĕĕÅąąÕÅõąÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000015 *
15
,
,
(c) The resistance of the LDR decreases and the resistance of the thermistor increases.
(i)
State what has happened to the light intensity incident on the LDR and the temperature
of the thermistor.
intensity of incident light on LDR: ......................................................................................
temperature of thermistor: .................................................................................................
[1]
(ii)
Explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝû¶Ă×
ĬݾûÚĪĊĞçôôÄĉÝìÉġĂ
ĥŵĕµµąĕąĥĕąąµåµĕÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
16
,
7
,
A solid bar is inside a copper solenoid. Fig. 7.1 shows that the copper solenoid is connected in
series with a battery and a variable resistor.
copper solenoid
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000016 *
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
bar
Fig. 7.1
The device shown in Fig. 7.1 is an electromagnet.
(a) Suggest a suitable material for the bar.
(b) The right-hand end of the bar is the S pole.
Fig. 7.2 shows the bar viewed from above.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
On Fig. 7.2, draw at least six field lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic
field surrounding the bar.
S
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßù¶Ą×
ĬݾúÚĤüīÔîûËëāĊÙęĂ
ĥõĥĕõµąµĥÅĥąÅµąµąÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(i)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000017 *
17
,
(ii)
,
The resistance of the variable resistor increases.
Explain what happens to the magnetic field surrounding the bar and state how the pattern
of field lines that represents the field changes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) A square coil of many turns is placed close to the bar. Fig. 7.3 shows the plane of the square
coil parallel to the flat circular surface at the right-hand end of the bar.
terminals
copper solenoid
square coil
bar
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
Fig. 7.3
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
The resistance of the variable resistor is alternately increased and decreased.
Explain what happens in the wires of the square coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßû¶Ą×
ĬݽùÒĦøěåČĆþïùÎÙĩĂ
ĥõĕÕµÕĥÕõµµąÅÕĥõĕÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
18
,
8
,
The nuclide notation for the radioactive isotope carbon-14 is 146C.
(a) Using the symbols shown in Fig. 8.1, draw a diagram to show the number of electrons,
neutrons and protons in a neutral atom of carbon-14 and how they are arranged.
symbols:
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000018 *
electron
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
neutron
[3]
(b) Describe how the composition of a neutral atom of carbon-14 is different from the composition
of a neutral atom of nitrogen-14 (147N).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞù¸Ă×
ĬÝ¿úÓĢôíÎõôġÇăĞġġĂ
ĥåąÕõµåµÅõĥÅÅĕąµµÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Fig. 8.1
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
proton
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000019 *
19
,
,
(c) Carbon-14 decays by beta (β) emission.
(i)
State the name of a particle that is identical to a beta-particle.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Describe the change that takes place in carbon-14 as a beta-particle is emitted.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The half-life of carbon-14 is 5700 years.
A very old object is made of wood. It contains 1.2 × 1011 atoms of carbon-14. When it was
manufactured, it contained 9.6 × 1011 atoms of carbon-14.
Determine the time that has passed since it was manufactured.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
time passed = ......................................................... [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2024
Ĭ×Ċ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞû¸Ă×
ĬÝÀùÛĨðýëăýèēûºġđĂ
ĥåõĕµÕÅÕÕąµÅÅõĥõåÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
[Turn over
20
,
9
,
The Milky Way is the galaxy in which the Solar System is located.
(a) State what a galaxy is.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000020 *
Determine this distance in kilometres (km).
distance = ................................................... km [2]
(c) Astronomers determine the speed and distance from the Earth of a far galaxy that is moving
away from the Earth.
(i)
State one observation that allows the speed at which a galaxy is moving away to be
determined.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) The Milky Way has a diameter that is approximately equal to 100 000 light-years.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State one different observation that is used to determine the distance to a far galaxy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
State how the speeds of galaxies and their distances from the Earth are related.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
The best estimate for the Hubble constant H0 is 2.2 × 10–18 per second.
Use this value to calculate an estimate for the age of the Universe.
age of the Universe = ...................................................... s [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
ĬÕĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàù¸Ą×
ĬÝÀüÛĞþČÐýĆß±×ĜñĩĂ
ĥĕåĕõÕÅõµåÅÅąõÅõµÕ
0625/41/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
* 0000800000001 *
,
,
Cambridge IGCSE™
¬OŠ. 4mHuOªEŠ_z6€W
¬jZzZ§‰x^x„‹un[™‚
¥••U5UeU5¥eE 5E5eU
* 5 7 7 6 2 5 6 3 0 3 *
PHYSICS
0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2024
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (DE/FC) 337956/3
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000002 *
2
,
1
,
(a) A rocket has an initial mass of 7.4 × 106 kg.
(i)
Calculate the initial weight of the rocket.
(ii)
Define, in words, the term weight.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows part of the speed-time graph for the rocket as it leaves the ground and travels
into space.
10 000
B
9000
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
8000
A
speed 7000
m/s
6000
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
weight = ......................................................... [1]
5000
4000
2000
1000
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i)
Describe the motion of the rocket:
From O to A .......................................................................................................................
From A to B ........................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÍĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞü¸þ×
ĬêÜùÛģýĒÕĉöĨÕÿ¾ģđĂ
ĥÅąÕõµĥµąåõąąõåõąÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
O
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
3000
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000003 *
3
,
(ii)
,
Draw a tangent to the graph at time = 400 s and use this to calculate the acceleration of
the rocket at this time. Show your working.
acceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Rockets are used to launch satellites into space. When the satellite is released, the rocket
returns to the Earth.
Explain in terms of forces why the rocket reaches terminal velocity as it travels through the
atmosphere back to the Earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2024
ĬÏĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞú¸þ×
ĬêÛúÓĥāĢäïċáā÷ĚģġĂ
ĥÅõĕµÕąÕĕÕåąąĕŵĕÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
[Turn over
4
,
Fig. 2.1 shows a golfer about to hit a golf ball with a golf club. The initial momentum of the golf ball
is zero.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
2
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000004 *
Fig. 2.1
(a) Define momentum.
Calculate the impulse on the golf ball.
impulse = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the force applied to the ball by the golf club.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÍĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàü¸Ā×
ĬêÛûÓğóħ×ñĄêãÛ¼óęĂ
ĥõåĕõÕąõõõÕąÅĕĥµąÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(i)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) The golf club is in contact with the ball for 5.0 × 10–4 s. The velocity of the golf ball as it leaves
the golf club is 41 m / s. The golf ball has a mass of 0.046 kg.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000005 *
5
,
3
,
(a) State two energy resources for which radiation from the Sun is the main source of energy.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A wind turbine is used to generate electricity.
The useful output from the turbine in 1.0 s is 6000 J. The kinetic energy of the wind hitting the
turbine in 1.0 s is 11 000 J. The velocity of the wind hitting the turbine is 6.3 m / s.
(i)
Show that the mass of air hitting the turbine each second is approximately 550 kg.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[2]
(ii)
Calculate the efficiency of the turbines. You may assume that all the kinetic energy stored
in the wind is transferred to the turbine.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
efficiency = ......................................................% [2]
(c) Tidal energy and wind energy are both renewable energy resources.
Suggest one reason why tidal energy is a more useful energy resource than wind energy.
Ignore the costs of construction and maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÏĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàú¸Ā×
ĬêÜüÛĩïėâćíğ÷ãĠóĩĂ
ĥõÕÕµµĥĕĥąąąÅõąõĕÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
[Turn over
6
,
4
,
Fig. 4.1 shows a pressure cooker on an electric heating element. The cooker has a tight-fitting lid.
tight-fitting lid
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000006 *
electric heating
element
Fig. 4.1
(a) The pressure cooker is half-full of water. As the water is heated some water evaporates
before the water boils.
Describe two differences between evaporation and boiling of the water in the cooker.
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
water
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) As the water is heated, the pressure of the gas inside the cooker increases.
Explain this increase in pressure in terms of particles.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÑĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝúµþ×
ĬêÛüØģėčêĄĀĖėÛýÛęĂ
ĥåõÕµĕĥµåĥåąąõåµÅÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000007 *
7
,
5
,
On a sunny day, the temperatures of a black tarmac road and the air above the road increase.
(a) Explain why the surface temperature of the tarmac increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State the method of thermal energy transfer from the tarmac to the air immediately above
the road.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State the main method of thermal energy transfer from the air immediately above the road to
the rest of the air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(d) Explain why the surface temperature of the tarmac is higher than the surrounding air
temperature.
© UCLES 2024
ĬÓĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝüµþ×
ĬêÜûÐĥěĝÏöñÓÃãÙÛĩĂ
ĥåąĕõõąÕµĕõąąĕÅõÕÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
[Turn over
6
,
A student plays the violin near the doorway to a large room. Fig. 6.1 shows a young teacher
standing where he can hear the sound but cannot see the student.
student
playing
violin
room
open door
X
young teacher
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)
State the wave effect that allows the young teacher to hear sounds from the violin at the
position he is standing in Fig. 6.1.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
8
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000008 *
Calculate the frequency of sound with a wavelength of 0.75 m.
The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
frequency = ......................................................... [2]
(iii)
A violin produces sounds in the frequency range 200 Hz–3800 Hz. The width of the open
doorway is 0.75 m.
Explain why the young teacher hears the frequency calculated in (a)(ii) clearly but finds
a frequency of 3500 Hz much harder to hear.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
•
•
•
draw a light ray from the violin to point X and from point X to the teacher
draw and label the mirror
add an arrow to the ray to show how the teacher sees the student.
Use a ruler and sharp pencil for this drawing.
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÑĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßúµĀ×
ĬêÜúÐğĩĬìüúÜġÿûËđĂ
ĥĕÕĕµõąõÕµąąÅĕĥõÅÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) A plane mirror is placed at point X so that the teacher can see the student.
On Fig. 6.1:
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000009 *
9
,
7
,
A washing machine has an electric motor and an electric heater. Fig. 7.1 shows a simplified circuit
diagram for the washing machine.
A
M
Fig. 7.1
The heater has a resistance of 25 Ω and the power supply has an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 230 V.
(a) State the meaning of electromotive force.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State the potential difference (p.d.) across the heater.
p.d. = ......................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the current in the heater.
Current = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The current in the motor is 1.6 A.
Determine the reading on the ammeter in Fig. 7.1. Explain your answer.
Ammeter reading ......................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÓĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßüµĀ×
ĬêÛùØĩĥĜÍþćčµ÷ßËġĂ
ĥĕåÕõĕĥĕÅÅÕąÅõąµÕÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
[Turn over
10
,
8
,
A fisherman uses high frequency sound waves to locate fish in the sea. Fig. 8.1 shows the sound
waves emitted from the boat.
fishing boat
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000010 *
seabed
Fig. 8.1 (not to scale)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
sound waves
Calculate the time taken for the boat to receive the reflected wave from the seabed after the
sound is emitted.
time = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÑĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞú·þ×
ĬêÙúÕĝġîæóñòýýďóĩĂ
ĥŵյõåõõąąÅŵĥõõÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) High frequency sound waves travel from the boat through the sea water.
The speed of sound in water is 1500 m / s. The seabed is 22 m below the boat.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(a) State the name of sound waves which have a frequency greater than 20 kHz.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000011 *
11
,
,
(c) Fig. 8.2 shows a fish below the boat.
fishing boat
fish
seabed
Fig. 8.2 (not to scale)
Describe and explain how the reflected sound wave received by the boat from the fish differs
from the reflected sound wave received from the seabed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
sound waves
© UCLES 2024
ĬÓĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÞü·þ×
ĬêÚùÍīĝþÓąĀ·ÙõËóęĂ
ĥÅÅĕõĕÅĕĥõÕÅÅÕąµĥÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
[Turn over
9
,
Fig. 9.1 shows a wireless charging plate used to charge the battery in a mobile phone (cell phone).
The coil of wire is part of an electric circuit.
charging plate
coil of wire
Fig. 9.1
The charging plate is connected to an a.c. power supply. The power supply is turned on.
(a) Describe the magnetic field around the charging plate in terms of its magnitude and direction.
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
12
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000012 *
(b) A mobile phone is placed on the charging plate as shown in Fig. 9.2. The coil in the mobile
phone is part of a separate circuit that charges the battery.
secondary coil
mobile phone
charging plate
primary coil
Fig. 9.2
The coil in the charging plate and the coil in the mobile phone act like a transformer.
(i)
Explain why there is a current in the secondary coil shown in Fig. 9.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Suggest why the transformer made from the charging plate and mobile phone is not
100% efficient.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÑĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàú·Ā×
ĬêÚüÍġďċèċć°ûÙĩģġĂ
ĥõĕĕµĕŵąÕåÅąÕåµõÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
13
,
,
(c) The mobile phone battery can be recharged using this charging plate and stores 4.5 × 104 J
of energy when fully recharged. The current in the secondary coil is 0.63 A when the output
voltage is 12 V.
(i)
Calculate the time taken to fully recharge a completely uncharged battery.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the charge passing through the battery in 60 s.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000013 *
charge = ......................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÓĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊàü·Ā×
ĬêÙûÕħēûÑíúùßá­ģđĂ
ĥõĥÕõõåÕĕåõÅąµÅõĥÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
[Turn over
,
12
14
10 Carbon-14 ( 6 C) is a radioactive isotope of carbon. Carbon-12 ( 6 C) is not radioactive.
12
14
(a) Explain how an atom of carbon-14 ( 6 C) differs from an atom of carbon-12 ( 6 C).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) All living organisms contain both carbon-12 atoms and carbon-14 atoms. The ratio of
carbon-14 to carbon-12 is 1 : 1 × 1012.
Carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years.
(i)
When an organism dies no new carbon is absorbed. The amount of carbon-12 in the
dead organism remains fixed.
Describe how the amount of carbon-14 in the dead organism decreases with time.
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
14
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000014 *
(ii)
A sample of wood contains carbon-14 to carbon-12 atoms in the ratio 1 : 4 × 1012.
Calculate how many years ago the tree died.
......................................... years ago [3]
(c) Other radioactive isotopes have different half-lives.
Suggest a use of a radioactive isotope with a half-life of one hour.
Explain why a short half-life is suitable for this use.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÍĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßû¶Ă×
ĬêÚùØĩĠăãûíÖăü¹ÓęĂ
ĥÕĥĕµĕĥõõµõąÅõĥµµÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
use ............................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000015 *
15
,
11
(a) (i)
,
State the name of one planet that has an orbit further away from the Sun than Venus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the name of one planet that has an orbit closer to the Sun than Venus.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) Venus has an average radius of orbit of 1.1 × 1011 m and an orbital period of 220 Earth days.
Calculate the average orbital speed of Venus. Give your answer in m / s.
average orbital speed = .................................................. m / s [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(c) State the relationship between the orbital speeds of the planets and their distances from the
Sun.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Comets are balls of ice and dust. Some comets orbit the Sun.
State how the speed of a comet changes as it orbits the Sun.
Explain your answer using ideas about the conservation of energy.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
You may include a labelled diagram in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2024
ĬÏĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊßù¶Ă×
ĬêÙúÐğĤóÖýĄēץĝÓĩĂ
ĥÕĕÕõõąĕĥÅåąÅĕąõåÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
16
,
,
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
ĬÍĊ®Ġ´íÈõÏĪÅĊÝû¶Ą×
ĬêÙûÐĥĒöáăċĜõà¿ÃđĂ
ĥĥÅÕµõąµąĥÕąąĕåõµÕ
0625/42/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
BLANK PAGE
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000016 *
* 0000800000001 *
,
,
Cambridge IGCSE™
¬WŠ. 4mHuOªEŠ^z5€W
¬eSyZ©€¡hŒsg5W0;ª‚
¥¥¥•5• u5 ¥ •e5UU
* 8 2 9 0 6 7 4 0 9 2 *
PHYSICS
0625/43
Paper 4 Theory (Extended)
October/November 2024
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
●
Answer all questions.
●
Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
●
Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
●
Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
●
Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
●
Do not write on any bar codes.
●
You may use a calculator.
●
You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
●
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 9.8 N (acceleration of free fall = 9.8 m / s2).
INFORMATION
●
The total mark for this paper is 80.
●
The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 20 pages.
DC (CE/CGW) 337964/5
© UCLES 2024
[Turn over
2
,
1
(a) (i)
,
State the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ [1]
(ii)
Define momentum.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000002 *
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ [1]
(b) A test car crashes into a barrier to test the safety features. The test car has a total mass of
950 kg. It is moving with constant velocity from time t = 0 for 4.0 s. At t = 4.0 s, the car hits the
barrier.
Fig. 1.1 shows the car as it hits the barrier.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Fig. 1.1
(i)
During the test crash, the resultant force acting on the car is 27 000 N. The car takes
1.5 s to come to rest. The deceleration is uniform.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
barrier
© UCLES 2024
ĭÖċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċàý¸ÿØ
ĭæÒûÜĞčĈÐöĆÍþÞāĄģă
Ħ¶öĖööÆĖĆƶÆĆÖÆööÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
initial velocity = ......................................................... [3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Calculate the initial velocity of the car.
3
,
(ii)
,
On Fig. 1.2, sketch a speed–time graph to show the motion of the car from time t = 0 until
the car becomes stationary.
speed
m/s
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000003 *
0
0
4.0
Fig. 1.2
time / s
[2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
ĭØċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċàû¸ÿØ
ĭæÓúÔĬĉøëĄýþÚÖÝĄēă
Ħ¶ĆÖ¶ĖæöĖ¶ĦÆƶæ¶ĦÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
4
,
2
,
(a) Describe an experiment to determine the spring constant of a spring.
State:
•
•
•
the apparatus you need
details of how to take measurements
how to calculate the spring constant
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000004 *
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
You may use the space below to draw a labelled diagram as part of your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÖċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċÞý¸āØ
ĭæÓýÔĢ÷óÎþôćüúûĔīă
ĦĆÖÖöĖæÖöĖĖÆÆ¶Ć¶öÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
5
,
hook
spring
140 cm
100 cm
baby in
holder
Fig. 2.1
Two springs Q and R are tested to determine their spring constants.
Each spring is tested up to its limit of proportionality.
Define ‘limit of proportionality’.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(i)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a baby in a baby bouncer. The baby bouncer consists of a holder suspended
from a spring. The baby pushes his feet on the ground and bounces gently up and down.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000005 *
Table 2.1 shows the results of the tests.
spring
spring constant
N / cm
Q
7.8
R
1.1
Table 2.1
The total weight of the baby and the holder is 120 N.
Calculate the extension of each spring for this weight.
extension of spring Q = ...............................................................
extension of spring R = ...............................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2024
ĭØċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċÞû¸āØ
ĭæÒüÜĨûăíüÿÄàĂßĔěă
ĦĆæĖ¶öƶĦĦÆÆÆÖĦöĦÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
6
,
(iii)
,
The unstretched length of each spring is 25 cm.
State and explain which spring would be more suitable for the baby bouncer in Fig. 2.1.
spring ................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000006 *
© UCLES 2024
ĭÚċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċáû·ÿØ
ĭæÓüÙĞēčåñð»ÀúÀ¼īă
ĦÖĆĖ¶ÖÆĖæĆĦÆĆÖƶ¶Ö
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 7]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000007 *
7
,
3
,
Fig. 3.1 shows a portable shower used on a campsite. The bag is filled with water. The water is
heated using infrared radiation from the Sun.
shower bag
painted black
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
showerhead
Fig. 3.1
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(a) (i)
Explain why the shower bag is painted black.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Explain a disadvantage of radiation from the Sun being the only source to heat the
water.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) Solar energy is a renewable energy resource.
State two other renewable energy resources.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÜċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċáý·ÿØ
ĭæÒýÑĬďýÖċăðĜĂĜ¼ěă
ĦÖöÖö¶æö¶ö¶ÆƶæöæÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
8
,
,
(c) During the day, the Sun shines on the shower bag and some of the energy in the infrared
radiation from the Sun transfers to the thermal energy stores of the water.
The water absorbs 60% of the energy incident on the bag. The temperature of the water rises
from 10 °C to 43 °C.
The mass of the water in the bag is 40 kg. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000008 *
Calculate the energy incident on the shower bag during the day.
energy = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÚċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċßû·āØ
ĭæÒúÑĢġîãĉĊùºÞºìģă
ĦĦæÖ¶¶æÖÖÖÆÆƶĆö¶Ö
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 8]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Show your working.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000009 *
9
,
4
,
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a ray of light as it enters the side of a plastic block. The ray of light passes
from air into the plastic.
plastic block
normal
r = 30°
i = 45°
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
air
ray of light
Fig. 4.1
(i)
State how the speed, wavelength and frequency of the wave in the plastic block compare
with their values in the air.
speed: ...............................................................................................................................
wavelength: .......................................................................................................................
frequency: .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Show that the refractive index of the plastic is 1.4.
Show your working.
Calculate the critical angle for the plastic.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(iii)
[1]
critical angle = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÜċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċßý·āØ
ĭæÓûÙĨĥþØóù²ĞÖĞìēă
ĦĦÖĖöÖƶÆæĖÆÆÖĦ¶æÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
10
,
,
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the same plastic as in (a) used to make an optical fibre. A ray of light is passing
along the fibre.
P
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000010 *
(i)
Carefully continue the ray of light P until it reaches the other end of the fibre.
(ii)
State two uses for optical fibres.
[2]
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÚċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċàû¹ÿØ
ĭæÕúÖĤĩĬáĀăÏÖàÎĔěă
Ħ¶ÆĖ¶¶ĆÖöĦÆĆÆĖĆöĆÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 9]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Fig. 4.2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000011 *
11
,
5
,
Fig. 5.1 shows a metal sphere S. The sphere has been charged with a negative charge.
S
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
There is an electric field around sphere S.
On Fig. 5.1, draw four field lines to show the pattern of the field and indicate the direction
of the field with arrows on the lines.
[2]
(ii)
Fig. 5.2 shows a position X next to sphere S.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
A small negatively charged particle is placed at position X.
X
S
Fig. 5.2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
State the direction of the force on the negatively charged particle at X due to the electric
field around sphere S.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
The negatively charged particle at X is released from rest.
Describe the motion of the small negatively charged particle due to the electric field
around sphere S.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÜċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċàý¹ÿØ
ĭæÔûÎĦĭĜÚúðĜĂØĊĔīă
Ħ¶¶ÖöÖĦ¶ĦĖĖĆÆöĦ¶ĖÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
12
,
,
(b) Fig. 5.3 shows sphere S being spray painted. Sphere S is negatively charged. As the paint
particles exit the wide nozzle of the paint sprayer, they become charged with a positive
charge.
paint sprayer
paint particles
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000012 *
positively
charged nozzle
Fig. 5.3
(i)
Explain why the paint particles spread out when they leave the nozzle.
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
S
Suggest and explain one advantage to using charged paint from a spray gun to paint
sphere S.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÚċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċÞû¹āØ
ĭæÔüÎĠěďßøùĕäüìĄēă
ĦĆĦÖ¶ÖĦĖƶĦĆĆöƶĆÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
The sphere can be painted by hand using a paintbrush.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000013 *
13
,
6
,
(a) A car windscreen is covered in condensation (small droplets of water). Thermal energy is
used to remove the droplets of water. The thermal energy is provided by three resistors on
the windscreen.
Fig. 6.1 shows two possible circuits for the three resistors.
The three resistors are identical.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
12 V car
battery
12 V car
battery
Circuit A
Circuit B
Fig. 6.1
(i)
Describe two advantages of using Circuit B.
1 .........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)
Describe, in terms of the water particles, the process by which the water droplets are
removed from the car windscreen using the heater.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÜċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċÞý¹āØ
ĭæÕýÖĪėğÜĂĊÖøĄðĄģă
ĦĆĖĖö¶ĆöĖƶĆĆĖæöĖÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
14
,
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a circuit containing two resistors, P and Q. The circuit is powered by a 12 V
battery.
12 V
90 Ω
70 Ω
Q
Fig. 6.2
(i)
Calculate the current in resistor Q.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(ii)
Calculate the energy transferred electrically when the current calculated in (b)(i) is
present in resistor Q for 5 minutes.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
(iii)
Energy is transferred from the battery by the electrical current.
State the energy store in the battery.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
P
Calculate the total resistance of the circuit.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000014 *
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÖċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċßü¶ăØ
ĭæÔûÙĨĪėêĈÿûÜÛü´īă
ĦæĖÖ¶ÖÆÖöÖ¶ÆÆÖƶÆÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
total resistance = ......................................................... [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000015 *
15
,
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a barrier at the entrance to a car park. The wooden barrier arm has a weight of
60 N which acts through the centre of gravity at the position shown on Fig. 7.1.
d
soft iron bar A
wooden barrier arm
pivot
weight of wooden barrier arm
= 60 N
Fig. 7.1
(a) Initially the wooden barrier arm is horizontal.
Using Fig. 7.1, calculate the clockwise moment of the weight of the wooden arm about
the pivot.
clockwise moment = ................................................... Nm [1]
(ii)
The wooden barrier arm is in equilibrium. The mass of the soft iron bar A is 23 kg.
Calculate the distance d between the pivot and the joint holding the soft iron bar A.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
centre of gravity
1.7 m
joint
(i)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
distance d = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2024
ĭØċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċßú¶ăØ
ĭæÕúÑĢĦħÑòô°Āãà´ěă
ĦæĦĖö¶æ¶ĦæĦÆƶĦöÖÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
16
,
,
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a coil attached to a power supply placed below the soft iron bar A.
d
1.7 m
joint
soft iron bar A
power +
supply −
pivot
weight
= 60 N
coil
soft iron core
Fig. 7.2
(i)
State and explain what happens to the wooden barrier arm when the switch in the coil
circuit is closed.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000016 *
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
The switch is opened. An operator decreases the potential difference across the coil and
the switch is closed.
State and explain how the effect on the wooden barrier arm compares with the effect in
(b)(i).
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iii)
A student suggests that the soft iron bar A is replaced by a steel bar. Explain why a steel
bar is less effective than a soft iron bar in the barrier.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2024
ĭÖċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċáü¶ąØ
ĭæÕýÑĬĘĤìðý¹Þÿþäģă
ĦĖ¶Ė¶¶æĖĆĆĖÆƶÆöÆÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
explanation ........................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
statement ..........................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000017 *
17
,
8
,
An isotope of boron is used in the treatment of cancer in the brain.
Boron sticks to cancer cells in the brain.
(a) The isotope of boron is bombarded with neutrons then undergoes fission to form lithium and
alpha‑particles.
(i)
Describe one difference between fission and fusion.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
A nucleus of boron (B) contains 5 protons and 5 neutrons. Complete the nuclide equation
for this fission reaction.
.........
.........
B + 10 n
.........
.........
Li + .........
α
.........
[3]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
(b) The alpha‑particles destroy the cancer cells. Suggest and explain one reason why alpha
particles are more suitable than gamma radiation for use in this treatment of brain cancer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Other cancers are treated with gamma radiation. Describe one safety precaution a nurse or
radiologist takes during this treatment.
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2024
ĭØċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċáú¶ąØ
ĭæÔüÙĞĜĔÏĊĆòú÷Úäēă
ĦĖÆÖöÖÆöĖöÆÆĆÖæ¶ÖÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000018 *
18
9
,
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a diagram of a transverse wave.
Q
wave
P
S
R
V
T
U
Fig. 9.1
From Fig. 9.1, identify all the lengths which represent one wavelength.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Hydrogen in a very distant galaxy emits electromagnetic radiation which is observed on the
Earth.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
,
On the Earth, hydrogen in the laboratory emits electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 656 nm.
Name the effect that the scientists observe and state what this shows about the very distant
galaxy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
Scientists on the Earth measure the wavelength of the radiation from the very distant galaxy.
The wavelength is 918 nm.
© UCLES 2024
ĭÖċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċÞü¸ăØ
ĭæÒýÖĪĐöæùôďÂāĪĜěă
ĦÆÖÖ¶¶ĆĖæ¶ĖĆĆĖÆööÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000019 *
19
,
,
(c) Table 9.1 shows a wavelength of electromagnetic radiation from hydrogen observed in the
laboratory and from three galaxies.
The galaxies are at different distances from the Earth.
Table 9.1
object
wavelength of hydrogen from object,
observed on the Earth / nm
gas tube in laboratory
656
nearby galaxy
667
distant galaxy
750
very distant galaxy
918
Describe what Table 9.1 shows about the motions of the galaxies and state what this suggests
is happening to the Universe.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2024
ĭØċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċÞú¸ăØ
ĭæÓüÎĠĔĆÕăÿÜĖù®Ĝīă
ĦÆæĖöÖĦö¶ÆÆĆĆöæ¶ĦÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
[Turn over
20
,
,
10 (a) Stars more massive than the Sun can eventually form black holes.
Describe how a black hole can be formed from a more massive star.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
* 0000800000020 *
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The star system V404 Cygni contains a black hole. The system is approximately
7800 light‑years from the Earth.
(i)
Describe what is meant by a light‑year.
...........................................................................................................................................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
...................................................................................................................................................
(ii)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Calculate the approximate distance from V404 Cygni to the Earth in km.
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of Cambridge Assessment. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of Cambridge
Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2024
ĭÖċ¯ġµîÉöÐīÆċàü¸ąØ
ĭæÓûÎĦĢąèāĆÕ¸ÝĐČēă
ĦööĖ¶ÖĦÖÖĦ¶ĆÆöƶöÖ
0625/43/O/N/24
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
[Total: 6]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN
distance = ................................................... km [2]